Menu

Acts 28:8 — Word Study

Depth

N1904Ἐγένετο δὲ τὸν πατέρα τοῦ Ποπλίου πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον κατακεῖσθαι· πρὸς ὃν Παῦλος εἰσελθὼν καὶ προσευξάμενος, ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῷ, ἰάσατο αὐτόν.¶

BSAIt came to passginomai thende theho fatherpatēr [male parent, patriarch] <the>ho of PubliusPoplios with feverspuretos [a high temperature, inflammation] andkai with dysenterydusenteria [a severe intestinal illness, bloody flux] oppressedsunechō [was] lying;katakeimai [afflicted, suffering] topros whomhos, hē <the>ho PaulPaulos having enteredeiserchomai [entered, came to] andkai having prayed,proseuchomai [worshiping, petitioning God] having laidepitithēmi theho handscheir [laying on, imparting] on him,autos healediaomai [restored to health, cured] him.autos

Word
Listen & take awayActs 28
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 8 is in this chapter.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (autos) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Acts 28:8quick helps
In a sentencePaul healed Publius' father after praying and laying hands on him.
Who is speakingLuke, the author of Acts, recounting Paul's actions.
Where we areOn the island of Malta, where Paul is ministering after a shipwreck.
The hard wordγίνομαι
Take awayHealing follows prayer and action.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subject verbγίνομαι The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

1 of 24 occurs nowhere else in the New Testament — a word chosen on purpose.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Acts 28:8

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — Paul Heals Publius' Fathergenerated

7Nearby stood an estate belonging to Publius, the chief official of the island. He welcomed us and entertained us hospitably for three days.
8The father of Publius was sick in bed, suffering from fever and dysentery. Paul went in to see him, and after praying and placing his hands on him, he healed the man.
9After this had happened, the rest of the sick on the island came and were cured as well.
10The islanders honored us in many ways and supplied our needs when we were ready to sail.

Acts 28:8 describes how Paul visited the father of Publius, who was suffering from fever and dysentery. After entering his home, Paul prayed and laid hands on him, resulting in healing. This event demonstrates the power of prayer and the apostolic authority Paul exercised during his ministry.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Mark 1:30–31Simon’s mother-in-law was sick in bed with a fever, and they promptly told Jesus about her.
2Acts 9:40Then Peter sent them all out of the room. He knelt down and prayed, and turning toward her body, he said, “Tabitha, get up!” She opened her eyes, and seeing Peter, she sat up.
31 Kings 17:20–22Then he cried out to the LORD, “O LORD my God, have You also brought tragedy on this widow who has opened her home to me, by causing her son to die?”
4James 5:14–16Is any one of you sick? He should call the elders of the church to pray over him and anoint him with oil in the name of the Lord.
5Acts 9:17–18So Ananias went to the house, and when he arrived, he placed his hands on Saul. “Brother Saul,” he said, “the Lord Jesus, who appeared to you on the road as you were coming here, has sent me so that you may see again and be filled with the Holy Spirit.”

The Key Word γίνομαι, ginomaigenerated

The word Ἐγένετο (egeneto) is a second aorist middle deponent verb meaning 'it came to pass' or 'it happened.' It indicates an event that occurs, often marking a significant moment in the narrative.

In this context, it introduces the situation regarding Publius' father, emphasizing that the healing is part of the unfolding events of Paul's ministry.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The translations generally agree on the meaning of the verse, with slight variations in phrasing. The BSB states, 'The father of Publius was sick in bed,' while the KJV uses 'lay sick of a fever and of a bloody flux.'

The main differences arise with the rendering of specific terms. For instance, πυρετοῖς is translated as 'fever' in most versions, while the LSV opts for 'with fevers.' Similarly, δυσεντερίῳ is rendered as 'dysentery' in many translations, but as 'bloody flux' in the KJV.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb of the verse is Ἐγένετο, it came to pass, which introduces the narrative. The structure consists of clauses that describe the condition of Publius' father, Paul's actions, and the healing that follows.

The sentence is complex, with multiple clauses detailing the sequence of events: the father's illness, Paul's entrance, his prayer, and the healing.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

The term πατήρ (patēr) appears in the Septuagint, translating the Hebrew אָב (av), meaning 'father.' This connection emphasizes familial relationships, which are significant in both the Old and New Testaments.

The word ἰάομαι (iaomai), meaning 'to heal,' also has roots in the Septuagint, where it corresponds to the Hebrew רָפָא (rapha), underscoring the continuity of healing themes in Scripture.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Acts 28:8 tells us that Paul healed the father of Publius, who was sick with fever and dysentery. Paul entered the house, prayed, and laid hands on him, resulting in healing. This shows the power of prayer and God's ability to heal through His servants.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What was the condition of Publius' father?

He was sick in bed, suffering from fever and dysentery.

What did Paul do to heal him?

Paul went in to see him, prayed, and laid his hands on him.

Why is this healing significant?

It demonstrates the apostolic authority of Paul and the power of prayer in healing.

What does this event tell us about Paul's ministry?

It highlights Paul's role as a healer and minister of the Gospel, showing God's work through him.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. How can I apply the power of prayer in my own life and the lives of others?
  2. What does this passage teach us about the importance of faith in healing?
  3. In what ways can I be a source of support and healing for those who are suffering?
  4. How does Paul's example inspire me to share the Gospel with others?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Several early church Fathers comment on this healing event, discussing its implications for faith and ministry.

John ChrysostomHomily on Acts 54 c. 347–407
"And it came to pass, that the father of Publius lay sick of a fever and of a bloody flux: to whom Paul entered in, and prayed, and laid his hands on him,
Early Church Fathers on Acts 28 →
John ChrysostomHomily on Acts 54 c. 347–407
Thereafter having met with his requital, he naturally honored Paul much more, when the others also received healing.
Early Church Fathers on Acts 28 →
BedeCommentary on Acts c. 673–735
It happened, however, that the father of Publius, afflicted with fever and dysentery, was lying down, etc. Why does he save an infirm unbeliever with prayer, who heals the faithful Timothy and Trophimus,
Early Church Fathers on Acts 28 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Acts 28:8 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

And it came to pass that the father of Publius,.... So that Publius was not an old man, though of so much dignity and wealth: the Arabic version, contrary to all copies, and other versions, reads,

Read John Gill on Acts 28 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

And it came to pass, that the father of Publius lay sick of a fever and of a bloody flux: to whom Paul entered in, and prayed, and laid his hands on him, and healed him.

Read Robert Jamieson on Acts 28 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

A bloody flux; a painful and dangerous disease; the torment in the bowels frequently causing a fever. And prayed; Paul could do nothing of himself, and therefore begs of God the recovery of Publius’ s father. It is God only that kills and makes alive, . Laid his hands on him; this imposition of hands was commonly used in miraculous cures, as ; and is joined with prayer, , which it might be a symbol of. Thus Publius was well paid for what he did for Paul and his company. Relieving of the poor and distressed is frequently rewarded in this world, and not only in the world to come. And God now recommends the gospel and the ministry of Paul by this miracle also: for none could do such things as…

Read Matthew Poole on Acts 28 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

8 And it came to pass, that the father of Publius lay sick of a fever and of a bloody flux: to whom Paul entered in, and prayed, and laid his hands on him, and healed him. Ver. 8. Sick of a fever] Which hath its name both in Greek and Latin from the fire that is in it, πυρετος. Febris a fervore. The difference is not so great whether a man broil in the bed, or at a stake by frying a faggot: fear it not.

Read John Trapp on Acts 28 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(8) Lay sick of a fever and a bloody flux.—Literally, with fevers and dysentery, both words being used by St. Luke with professional precision. The plural, “fevers,” probably indicates the attacks of a recurrent fever, and its combination with dysentery would, according to Hippocrates, who also uses the plural form (Aph. vi. 3), make the case more than usually critical. The disease is said to be far from uncommon in Malta. Prayed, and laid his hands on him.—The union of the two acts reminds us of the rule given in James 5:14-15; and the close sequence of the work of the healing upon the escape from the serpent’s bite, of the juxtaposition of the two promises of Mar 16:18.

Read Charles John Ellicott on Acts 28 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 8. The father of Publius lay sick] πυρετοιςκαιδυσεντερια; Of a fever and dysentery; perhaps a cholera morbus. Paul - prayed] That God would exert his power; and laid his hands on him, as the means which God ordinarily used to convey the energy of the Holy Spirit, and healed him; God having conveyed the healing power by this means. In such a disorder as that mentioned here by St. Luke, where the bowels were in a state of inflammation, and a general fever aiding the dysentery in its work of death, nothing less than a miracle could have made an instantaneous cure in the patient. Such a cure was wrought, and even the heathens saw that it was the hand of God.

Read AdamClarke on Acts 28 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

8. And it came to pass, that] [R.V. “and it was so, that”]. The R. V. is the better modern rendering. The expression means “It happened that, &c.,” not that after the arrival of St Paul the father fell ill, which might be taken as the meaning of the A. V.of a fever and of a bloody flixe] [R. V. “of fever and dysentery”]. The words are technical such as a physician, as St Luke is reputed to have been, would be likely to use in describing the disease. The first, which is in the plural number, implies the fits of fever which occur at intervals in such diseases as ague.

Read Cambridge on Acts 28 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

A bloody flux - Greek: dysentery. And laid his hands on him ... - In accordance with the promise of the Saviour, Mark 16:18.

Read Albert Barnes on Acts 28 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

The father of Publius was sick in bed, suffering from fever and dysentery. Paul went in to see him, and after praying and placing his hands on him, he healed the man.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

The father of Publius lay sick of fever and dysentery. Paul entered in to him, prayed, and laying his hands on him, healed him.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

The father of Publius was sick in bed, suffering from fever and dysentery. Paul went in to see him, and after praying and placing his hands on him, he healed the man.

NETBNew English Translation2006

The father of Publius lay sick in bed, suffering from fever and dysentery. Paul went in to see him and after praying, placed his hands on him and healed him.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

And it came to pass, that the father of Publius lay sick of a fever and of a bloody flux: to whom Paul entered in, and prayed, and laid his hands on him, and healed him.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

And it was so, that the father of Publius lay sick of fever and dysentery: unto whom Paul entered in, and prayed, and laying his hands on him healed him.

RVARevised Version, American1894

And it was so, that the father of Publius lay sick of fever and dysentery: unto whom Paul entered in, and prayed, and laying his hands on him healed him.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

And it came to pass that the father of Publius lay sick with a fever, and a bloody-flux: to whom Paul entered in, and prayed, and laid his hands on him, and healed him.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

And so it was, that the father of Publius lay sicke of the feauer, and of a bloodie flixe: to whom Paul entred in, and when he prayed, he laide his hands on him, and healed him.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

And it happened that the father of Publius lay ill of fever and dysentery; to whom Paul entered in, and having prayed and laid his hands on him cured him.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

and it came to pass, the father of Publius with feverish heats and dysentery pressed, was laid, unto whom Paul having entered, and having prayed, having laid [his] hands on him, healed him;

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

and it came to pass, the father of Publius was lying, oppressed with fevers and dysentery, to whom Paul, having entered and having prayed, having laid [his] hands on him, healed him;

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

It happened that the father of Publius had been made ill with a fever and dysentery. When Paul went to him, he prayed, placed his hands on him, and healed him.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

And it happened that the father of Publius lay sick of a fever, and of a bloody flux. To whom Paul entered in; and when he had prayed, and laid his hands on him, he healed him.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

Now Publius' father was sick, lying in bed suffering from fever and dysentery. Paul went in to see him, and prayed for him, placed his hands on him, and healed him.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

And the father of Publius was ill, with a disease of the stomach; to whom Paul went, and put his hands on him, with prayer, and made him well.

Word by word, the decisions they made

Ἐγένετοginomai It came to pass G1096 2 different renderings
wasASV BBE BSB FBV GNV MSB RVA
it came to passKJV LSV NWB YLT
πυρετοῖςpuretos with fevers G4446 2 different renderings
feverASV BSB DBY DRA FBV KJV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB
with feversLSV
δυσεντερίῳdusenteria with dysentery G1420 2 different renderings
dysenteryASV BSB DBY FBV LSV MSB NETB RVA ULB WEB YLT
bloody fluxDRA KJV NWB
κατακεῖσθαι·katakeimai [was] lying; G2621 2 different renderings
sufferingBSB FBV MSB NETB
lyingLSV
εἰσελθὼνeiserchomai having entered G1525 2 different renderings
enteredASV DBY DRA KJV NWB RVA WEB
having enteredLSV YLT
προσευξάμενος,proseuchomai having prayed, G4336 3 different renderings
having prayedDBY LSV YLT
prayingBSB MSB NETB
he prayedGNV ULB

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseδὲthenclauseverbἐγένετοIt came to passnoun phrase · subjectclausenoun phrase · subjectτὸνthenoun phraseπατέραfathernoun phraseτοῦ-Ποπλίουof Publiusclause · adverbialnoun phrase · adverbialπυρετοῖςfeversκαὶandδυσεντερίῳdysenteryverbσυνεχόμενονoppressed withverbκατακεῖσθαιwas lyingclauseclause · adverbialclauseprepositional phrase · adverbialπρὸςtowardὃνwhomverbεἰσελθὼνhaving enteredκαὶandclauseverbπροσευξάμενοςhaving prayednoun phrase · subject-ΠαῦλοςPaulclause · adverbialverbἐπιθεὶςhaving laidnoun phrase · objectτὰςtheχεῖραςhandsindirect objectαὐτῷon himverbἰάσατοhealedobjectαὐτόνhim

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Contigit autem patrem Publii febribus et dysenteria vexatum jacere. Ad quem Paulus intravit : et cum orasset, et imposuisset ei manus, salvavit eum.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܐܒܘܗܝ ܕܝܢ ܕܦܘܦܠܝܘܣ ܒܐܫܬܐ ܘܒܟܐܒ ܡܥܝܐ ܟܪܝܗ ܗܘܐ ܘܥܠ ܠܘܬܗ ܦܘܠܘܣ ܘܨܠܝ ܘܣܡ ܥܠܘܗܝ ܐܝܕܗ ܘܐܚܠܡܗ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

Ἐγένετο δὲ τὸν πατέρα τοῦ Ποπλίου πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον κατακεῖσθαι· πρὸς ὃν Παῦλος εἰσελθὼν καὶ προσευξάμενος, ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῷ, ἰάσατο αὐτόν.¶

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

Ἐγένετο δὲ τὸν πατέρα τοῦ Ποπλίου πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον κατακεῖσθαι· πρὸς ὃν Παῦλος εἰσελθὼν καὶ προσευξάμενος, ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῷ, ἰάσατο αὐτόν.¶

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

Ἐγένετο δὲ τὸν πατέρα τοῦ Ποπλίου πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον κατακεῖσθαι· πρὸς ὃν Παῦλος εἰσελθὼν καὶ προσευξάμενος, ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῷ, ἰάσατο αὐτόν.¶

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

Ἐγένετο δὲ τὸν πατέρα τοῦ Ποπλίου πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον κατακεῖσθαι· πρὸς ὃν Παῦλος εἰσελθὼν καὶ προσευξάμενος, ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῷ, ἰάσατο αὐτόν.¶

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

Ἐγένετο δὲ τὸν πατέρα τοῦ Ποπλίου πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον κατακεῖσθαι· πρὸς ὃν Παῦλος εἰσελθὼν καὶ προσευξάμενος, ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῷ, ἰάσατο αὐτόν.¶

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

Ἐγένετο δὲ τὸν πατέρα τοῦ Ποπλίου πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον κατακεῖσθαι· πρὸς ὃν Παῦλος εἰσελθὼν καὶ προσευξάμενος, ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῷ, ἰάσατο αὐτόν.¶

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

Ἐγένετο δὲ τὸν πατέρα τοῦ Ποπλίου πυρετοῖς καὶ συνεχόμενον κατακεῖσθαι· πρὸς ὃν Παῦλος εἰσελθὼν καὶ προσευξάμενος, ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῷ, ἰάσατο αὐτόν.¶

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

Ἐγένετο δὲ τὸν πατέρα τοῦ Ποπλίου πυρετοῖς καὶ συνεχόμενον κατακεῖσθαι· πρὸς ὃν Παῦλος εἰσελθὼν καὶ προσευξάμενος, ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῷ, ἰάσατο αὐτόν.¶

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse they differ
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

WordEditions carrying itMissing from
δυσεντερίῳ with dysenteryNA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, TregTR, Byz

Apparatus — SBL Greek New Testament, CC BY 4.0


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Acts 28:8γίνομαιIt came to It came to passγίνομαιδέthenthenδέthetheπατήρfatherfatherπατήρ<the><the>Πόπλιοςof Publiusof PubliusΠόπλιοςπυρετόςwith feverswith feversπυρετόςκαίandandκαίδυσεντέριονwith dysentwith dysenteryδυσεντέριονσυνέχωoppressedoppressedσυνέχωκατάκειμαι[was] lying[was] lying;κατάκειμαιπρόςtotoπρόςὅςwhomwhomὅς<the><the>ΠαῦλοςPaulPaulΠαῦλοςεἰσέρχομαιhaving entehaving enteredεἰσέρχομαικαίandandκαίπροσεύχομαιhaving prayhaving prayed,προσεύχομαιἐπιτίθημιhaving laidhaving laidἐπιτίθημιthetheχείρhandshandsχείραὐτόςon him,on him,αὐτόςἰάομαιhealedhealedἰάομαιαὐτόςhim.him.αὐτόςπυρέσσωv. I am siv. I am sick wiπυρέσσωσύνPrep. withPrep. withσύνκατάPrep. downPrep. down fromκατάεἰςPrep. intoPrep. into, in,εἰςπρόςPrep. to, Prep. to, towarπρόςἀήρn.m. airn.m. airἀήρἑαυτοῦRefl.pr. hRefl.pr. himselἑαυτοῦπρόPrep. befoPrep. beforeπρόArticle thArticle theοὗAdv where,Adv where, whitοὗπαύωv. I causev. I cause to cπαύωχειμώνn.m. a temn.m. a tempest,χειμώνχάσμαn.n. a gapn.n. a gap, gulχάσμαἐπίPrep. on, Prep. on, to, aἐπίἐπιστρέφωv. I turn v. I turn back ἐπιστρέφωἐπιτίθημιv. I put, v. I put, placeἐπιτίθημιἐπερωτάωv. I interv. I interrogatἐπερωτάωὄψιοςAdj lateAdj lateὄψιος
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Acts 28:8

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
Ἐγένετοginomai It came to pass G1096 Verb · second aorist · middle deponent · indicative · third person · singular
668× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A versatile word meaning to be, become, or come into being, used in John 1:15 and 1 Corinthians 15:37.
Tyndale gloss
to be
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

γίνομαι (ginomai) is a versatile Greek verb meaning to come into being, be born, or arise. It covers a wide range of uses, from the creation of things to events occurring. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as birth (e.g., Romans 1:3), occurrences in nature (e.g., John 12:29), and actions being performed (e.g., Matthew 21:42). It can also express the idea of becoming or changing states.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

γίνομαι, Ion. and κοινή for Att. γίγν- (M. Pr., 47; Bl., §6, 8 Mayser, 166 f.),

[in LXX chiefly for היה ;]

of persons, things occurrences, to come into being, be born, arise, come on: Jo 1:15 8:58, I Co 15:37; a first appearance in public, Mk 1:4, Jo 1:6, al.; seq. ἐκ (of birth), Ro 1:3, Ga 4:4; διά, Jo 1:3; βροντή, Jo 12:29; σεισμός, Re 6:12; γογγυσμός, Ac 6:1; χαρά, Ac 8:8, many other similar exx.; ἡμέρα, Lk 22:66, al.; ὀψέ, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

γίνομαι (in Ionic prose writ.and in com. Grk. fr. Aristot. on for Attic γίγνομαι) ; [impf. ἐγινόμην ; fut. γενήσομαι ; 2 aor. ἐγενόμην (often in 3 pers. sing. optat. γένοιτο ; [ptep. yevapevos, Lk. xxiv. 22 Tdf. ed. 7]), and, with no diff. in signif., 1 aor. pass. ἐγενήθην, rejected by the Atticists (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 108 sq.; [Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 75, 6 sq.]), not rare in later Grk., common in Sept. (Acts iv. 4; 1 Th. ii. 14; 1 Co. xv. 10, etc.), impv. γενηθήτω (Mt. vi. 10; xv. 28, ete.) ; pf. γεγένημαι and γέγονα, 3 pers. plur. γέγοναν L T Tr WH in Ro. xvi. 7 and Rey. xxi. 6 (cf. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 166; Soph. Lex. p. 37 sq.; Curtius, Das Verbum, ii. 187]; W. 36 and 76 (73) sq-; Mullach p. 16; B. 43 (37 sq.)), [ptep. γεγονώς] ; plpf. 3 pers. sing. ἐγεγόνει (Jn. vi. 17 [not Tdf.];. Acts iv. 22 [where L T Tr WH γεγόνει, cf. W. § 12, 9; B. 33 (29); Tdf.’s note on…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

γίνομαι {Ξ ΠῚ. p. 210) γενοῦ πρὸς "Ata τὸν ποιμένα καὶ δέξαι παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ δραχμὰς διακοσίας, P Flor II. 180 (a.p. 253) ἐὰν γένηται πρός σε Διόσκορος, α΄. Γίνομαι sometimes supplies an aorist fir εἰμί : ἐγενόμην is normally ingressive (= became), but has to serve on occasion for summary (‘‘constative ’’) aorist as well—cf. Prolfeg. p. 109. Thus P. Flor III. 382% (cited ad 72.) might be translated ‘the son whom I neither have nor ever had,’’ as well as ‘‘ nor was ever born to me.” Lk 13? is an instance of this summary use. It appears in a very common technical usage, by which γενόμενος, with the tithe of an official, etc., denotes “ex-’’: where the title forms a verb, the aor, the perf.) partic. of this is used instead. arch” is γυμνασιαρχήσας. For the periphrasis cf. P Oxy I. 3811 (a.p. 49-50) (= Selections, p. 53) καθὰ π|ζα]ρῆλθον ἐπὶ τοῦ γενομένου τοῦ νομοῦ στρατηγοῦ Ilaciwyvos, “1…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

γίνομαι (ginomai) — to be.

γίγνομαι,

Ionic dialect and after [Refs 4th c.BC+] γίνομαι [ῑ], (Attic dialect Inscrr. have γιγν- in fifth and fourth cententury,[Refs]; Thess. γίνυμαι [Refs]; Boeotian dialect γίνιουμαι [Refs]future γενήσομαι: aorist ἐγενόμην (ἐγενάμην [LXX] (προ-) Decrees Byzantine cited in [Refs 4th c.BC+], Ionic dialect 2nd pers. singular γένευ [Refs 8th c.BC+], 3rd.pers. singular γενέσκετο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect γέντο [Refs 8th c.BC+] (gṇ-το): perfect γέγονα [Refs 8th c.BC+]: 3rd.pers. plural γέγοναν [NT]: pluperfect ἐγεγόνει [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ἐγεγόνεε [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect forms (as if from perfect γέγᾰα), 2nd pers. plural γεγάᾱτε [Refs 8th c.BC+]pluperfect ἐκ-γεγάτην [ᾰ] [Refs 8th c.BC+]; infinitive γεγάμεν [ᾰ] [Refs 8th c.BC+]; participle γεγᾰώς -ᾰυῖα, plural -ᾰῶτες, -ᾰυῖαι [Refs 8th c.BC+], contraction γεγώς, -ῶσα [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

γίνομαι

ginomai

a prolongation and middle voice form of a primary verb; to cause to be

("gen"-erate), i.e. (reflexively) to become (come into being), used

with great latitude (literal, figurative, intensive, etc.):--arise, be

assembled, be(-come, -fall, -have self), be brought (to pass), (be)

come (to pass), continue, be divided, draw, be ended, fall, be

finished, follow, be found, be fulfilled, + God forbid, grow, happen,

have, be kept, be made, be married, be ordained to be, partake, pass,

be performed, be published, require, seem, be showed, X soon as it

was, sound, be taken, be turned, use, wax, will, would, be wrought.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

γίνομαι

v.

I come into being, am born

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

γίνομαι ginomai 669x

pluperfect, ἐγενόει (3rd sg), to come into existence; to be created, exist by creation, Jn. 1:3, 10; Heb. 11:3; Jas. 3:9; to be born, produced, grow, Mt. 21:19; Jn. 8:58, et al.; to arise, come on, occur, as the phenomena of nature, etc.; Mt. 8:24, 26; 9:16, et al.; to come, approach, as morning or evening, Mt. 8:16; 14:15, 23; to be appointed, constituted, established, Mk. 2:27; Gal.…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2ADI-3S — Verb · second aorist · middle deponent · indicative · third person · singular
second aorist middle deponent indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2ADI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: middle Deponent Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
9%it came to pass
it came to pass9% · 64×became4% · 28×there was3% · 23×do be3% · 22×came3% · 19×having become3% · 18×was3% · 18×having been3% · 17×other renderings69% · 468×

677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 180 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb57%linking verb42%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 668 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
θάλασσαthe sea, lakeἐκεῖthere, yonder, tεἰμίI am, exist
Article the
δύναμιςmight, power, maεἰμίI am, existαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
ὄψιοςlateοὗτοςὡςas, like as, how
μήNeg
ἵναin order that, sοὐNegθεόςGod, a god
αὐτός
ἱμάτιονouter garmentδιάκλάδοςa branch
γίνομαιIt came to pass668×
what comes after →
Article the
δύναμιςmight, power, maθέλημαwill, wish, desiἔσχατοςlast, at the las
ἐν
Article theσύεἷςone
δέbut, on the other ha
ἐνArticle theἡμέραa day
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐNegἐκφύωI put forth, cau
εἰς
Article theκεφαλήthe headδένδρονa tree

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceγίνομαι · 668× in the New Testament
Luke Acts Matthew Mark John 1 Corinthians Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 Thessalonians Galatians 2 Corinthians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 11c. AD 40

πρὸς δὲ τὸ μὴ γεγονὸς οἰκείωσις οὐδεμία τῷ μὴ πεποιηκότι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς ὁ κατακλυσμὸς ἐγένετο καὶ ὃν τρόπον Νῶχος σωθεὶς ἐν λάρνακι μετὰ τῶν συγγενῶν κατῴκησεν ἐν τῷ Σινάρῳ πεδίῳ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.11c. AD 100

γενώμεθα πνευματικοί, γενώμεθα ναὸς τέλειος τῷ θεῷ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 22Thebais119 BC

ἔχω εἰς τὸν Ἑρμίου λόγον περὶ πῆς τοπογραμματείας τοῦ νγ ἔτους χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δέκα. γίνεται τάλαντα ι. καὶ περὶ τῆς κωμογραμματείας ὁμοίως χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δέκα. γίνεται τάλαντα ι. καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 37Thebais109 BC

ἀποστερέσαι … ησας ἀλλά … τας κατὰ κοινόν … ἐπίσκεψιν ποιησάσθαι. … τούτων γὰρ γενομένων ἐσόμεθα βεβοηθημένοι ὑφʼ ὑμῶν. ἔρρωσθε. ἔτους θ Φαρμοῦθι κζ, ἐπιλέγματος ἀναγνωσθέντος τοῦ ὑπομνήματος ἐκρίθη

P.Adl. 10Pathyris102 BC

λ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως τετανὸς μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὐλὴ φαλάνθῳ ἀριστερῶι χαλκοῦ νομίσματος τάλαντα δέκα δύο, γίνεται τάλαντα ιβ, ἄτοκα, ἡμερῶν τριάκοντα ἀπὸ μηνὸς Παῦνι ιθ. τὸ δὲ δάνειον τοῦτο ἀποδότω

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
δὲde then G1161 Conjunction
2,787× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a conjunction that means and, but, or then, used to connect ideas like in Matthew 1:2 and 2 Corinthians 6:15.
Tyndale gloss
then
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),

post-positive conjunctive particle;

copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δέ (de) — then.

δέ,

but: adversative and copulative Particle,

I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. without preceding μέν,

II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. copulative,

II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δέ

de

a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,

etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δέ

Cj.

but, on the other hand, and

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δέ de 2x

a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.

δέ is often redundant,

to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.

to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.

POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%now
now33% · 974×however27% · 780×then21% · 620×and12% · 360×but5% · 154×other renderings2% · 49×

2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existσύ
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπεντακισχίλιοιfive thousand
εἰCond
παλαιόςold, ancient, woσύεἰμίI am, exist
εἰμίI am, exist
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ἀναπίπτωI lie down, reclμνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche
οὗτος
δίδωμιI offer, giveθεόςGod, a godπίστιςfaith, belief, t
δέthen2787×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusθεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐπί
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theσύ
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὗτοςἸωάννηςJohn
τὶς
Article theαὐτόςὄνομαname, character,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδέ · 2,787× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John Mark Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians James 1 Timothy

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
τὸνho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASM — Article · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
πατέραpatēr father G3962 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
413× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A father is a male parent, like Joseph, the father of Jesus, as mentioned in Matthew 2:22 and Luke 1:17. It can also refer to a forefather or ancestor, like Abraham, as seen in Matthew 3:9 and John 8:39.
Amplified meaning
male parent, patriarch
Tyndale gloss
father
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πατήρ (patēr) means 'father' and can refer to a male parent, an ancestor, or even a metaphorical originator. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often in relation to God as the Father of believers, as well as in the context of respect for elders or teachers. The term can also denote a broader familial or ancestral connection, as seen in references to forefathers.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πατήρ, πατρός, -τρί, τέρα,

[in LXX chiefly and very freq. for אָב;]

a father;

prop.,

of the male parent: Mt 2:22, Lk 1:17, Jo 4:53; anarth., He 12:7 (M, Pr., 82 f.); pl., of both parents (cl.), He 11:23; οἱ π. τ. σαρκός, He 12:9;

of a forefather or ancestor (in cl. usually in pl.; Hom., al.): Mt 3:9, Lk 1:73, Jo 8:39, al.; pl., Mt 23:30, 32, Lk 6:23, 26, Jo 4:20,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πατήρ [fr. τ. pa; lit. nourisher, protector, upholder ; (Curtius § 348)], πατρός, -rpl, -τέρα, voc. πάτερ [for which the nom. 6 πατήρ is five times used, and (anarthrous) πατήρ in Jn. xvii. 21 T Tr WH, 24 and 25 LT Tr WH; ef. B. § 129,5; W.§ 29,2; WH. App. p. 158], plur. πατέρες, πατέρων, πατράσι (Heb. i.1), πατέρας, 6,[fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 38, a father; 1. prop., i. q. generator or male ancestor, and either a. the nearest ancestor: Mt. ii. 22; iv. 21 sq.; viii. 21; Lk.i.17; Jn. iv.53; Acts vii. 143 1 Co. v. 1, etc.; of πατέρες τῆς σαρκός, fathers of the corporeal nature, natural fathers, (opp. to ὁ πατὴρ τῶν πνευμάτων), Heb. xii. 9; plur. of both parents, Heb. xi. 23 (not infreq. in prof. auth., ef. Delitzsch ad loc.); or Ὄ. a more remote ancestor, the founder of α race or tribe, progenitor of a people, forefather: 80 Abraham is called, Mt. iii. 9; Lk. i. 73; xvi. 24; Jn. viii.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πατήρ. For the looser use οἵ πατήρ as a title or respect or honour, see P Oxy X. 1296 (iii/A.D.), where the writer

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πατήρ (patēr) — father.

πᾰτήρ, ὁ,

genitive and dative πατέρος, πατέρι in Epic dialect and Lyric poetry, Attic dialect πατρός, πατρί (which is also the commoner form in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; accusative always πατέρ; vocative πάτερ: plural πατέρες, πατέρας, πατέρων (πατρῶν only [Refs 8th c.BC+]; dative πατράσι [ᾰ] (cf. Sanskrit locative plural pitṛ[snull]u, no dative plural occurs in [Refs 8th c.BC+], late Epic dialect πατέρεσσι [Refs 4th c.AD+]:— father, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πατρὸς πατήρ grandfather,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὰ πρὸς πατρός by the father's side, [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc.; especially of God, the father of the Israelites, [LXX]; father of men, [NT]; father of Jesus Christ, [Refs]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πατήρ

pater

apparently a primary word; a "father" (literally or figuratively, near

or more remote):--father, parent.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πατήρ, πατρός, ὁ

n.m.

father, Father, ancestor

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πατήρ acc. always πατέρα gen. pl. rarely πατρῶν a father, Hom., etc.; πατρὸς πατήρ a grandfather, Il.; τὰ πρὸς πατρός ῀ πατρόθεν, by the father's side, Hdt.

among the gods Zeus is called πατήρ, πατὴρ Ζεύς, π. ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Hom., Hes.; so Ζεὺς π. Aesch.; Ζεῦ πάτερ καὶ θεοί Ar.

a respectful mode of addressing elderly persons, Od.

metaph. the father of anything, Lat. auctor, π. ἀοιδᾶν Pind., etc.

in pl. fathers, i.e. forefathers, Hom.; ἐξ ἔτι πατρῶν as an inheritance from one's fathers, Od.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

fa'-ther (Anglo-Saxon, Foeder; German, Vater; Hebrew 'abh, etymology uncertain, found in many cognate languages; Greek pater, from root pa, "nourisher," "protector," "upholder"):

1. Immediate Male Ancestor:

Immediate male ancestor. The father in the Hebrew family, as in the Roman, had supreme rights over his children, could dispose of his daughter in marriage (Ge 29), arrange his son's marriage (Ge 24), sell his children (Ex 21:7), but not his daughter to a stranger (Ne 5:5), had power of life and death, as in the case of Isaac (Ge 22), Jephthah's daughter (Jud 11:34), the sacrificing of his children to Molech (Le 18:21; 20:3-5), etc. Respect, reverence and affection for…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Father

A name applied (1) to any ancestor (Deut. 1:11; 1 Kings 15:11; Matt. 3:9; 23:30, etc.); and (2) as a title of respect to a chief, ruler, or elder, etc. (Judg. 17:10; 18:19; 1 Sam. 10:12; 2 Kings 2:12; Matt. 23:9, etc.). (3) The author or beginner of anything is also so called; e.g., Jabal and Jubal (Gen. 4:20, 21; comp. Job 38:28).

Smith's Bible Dictionary

The position and authority of the father as the head of the family are expressly assumed and sanctioned in Scripture, as a likeness of that of the Almighty over his creatures. It lies of course at the root of that so-called patriarchal government, (Genesis 3:16; 1 Corinthians 11:3) which was introductory to the more definite systems which followed, and which in part, but not wholly, superseded it. The father’s blessing was regarded as conferring special benefit, but his malediction special injury, on those on whom it fell, (Genesis 9:25,27; 27:27-40; 48:15,20; 49:1) ... and so also the sin of a parent was held to affect, in certain cases, the welfare of his descendants. (2 Kings…

Is often synonymous with ancestor, founder, or originator, as Ge 4:20-21 Joh 8:56 Ro 4:16. Joseph was a father to Pharoah, Ge 45:8, as his counselor and provider. God is the FATHER of men, as their Creator, De 32:6 Isa 63:16 64:8 Lu 3:38. But as we have forfeited the rights of children by our sins, it is only through Christ that we can call God by that endearing name, "our Father," Joh 20:17 Ro 8:15-17.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
86%father
father86% · 359×fathers12% · 51×other renderings2% · 9×

419 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject32%adverbial26%object21%predicate7%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 413 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,πρόςἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
θεόςGod, a godθάνατοςdeathἀδελφόςa brother
θεόςGod, a god
ἀπόArticle theἐν
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,προσεύχομαιI pray, pray forἸησοῦςJesus
σύ
ἐξομολογέωI consent fully,γράφωI writeπροσεύχομαιI pray, pray for
πατήρfather413×
what comes after →
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,Article theἐν
σύ
Article theκαίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theκύριοςlord, Lord, mastΧριστόςanointed, the Me
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,Article theμετά
Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastπαιδίονa little child, πέμπωI send

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπατήρ · 413× in the New Testament
John Matthew Luke Acts Mark Romans 1 John Ephesians Hebrews 1 Corinthians 1 Thessalonians 2 Corinthians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 615 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 7c. AD 40

Τινὲς γὰρ τὸν κόσμον μᾶλλον ἢ τὸν κοσμοποιὸν θαυμάσαντες τὸν μὲν ἀγένητόν τε καὶ ἀίδιον ἀπεφήναντο, τοῦ δὲ θεοῦ πολλὴν ἀπραξίαν ἀνάγνως κατεψεύσαντο, δέον ἔμπαλιν τοῦ μὲν τὰς δυνάμεις ὡς ποιητοῦ καὶ πατρὸς καταπλαγῆναι, τὸν δὲ μὴ πλέον ἀποσεμνῦναι…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.20c. AD 75–95

οὔτε γὰρ αὐτῷ ποτʼ ἂν γενέσθαι νοῦν ἀγαθὸν τῷ νομοθέτῃ ταύτης ἀπολειπομένῳ τῆς θέας, οὔτε τῶν γραφησομένων εἰς ἀρετῆς λόγον οὐδὲν ἀποβήσεσθαι τοῖς λαβοῦσιν, εἰ μὴ πρὸ παντὸς ἄλλου διδαχθεῖεν, ὅτι πάντων πατήρ τε καὶ δεσπότης ὁ θεὸς ὢν καὶ πάντα…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.7c. AD 100

λέγει δὲ πάλιν πρὸς αὐτούς: Μὴ ἐγὼ ἐνετειλάμην τοῖς πατράσιν ὑμῶν ἐκπορευομένοις ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, προσενέγκαι μοι ὁλοκαυτώματα καὶ θυσίας;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 31Pathyris105 BC

τὸ ἐπιβάλλον αὐτῷ μέρος δανείου οὗ ἔθετο Πατοῦς Ὥρου ὁ τῆς μητρὸς αὐτοῦ Ταρεήσιος πατὴρ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἀρχείου χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς Ε καὶ τοὺς τούτων τόκους· ὃς

P.Grenf. 2 26Pathyris104 BC

Φαγώνι, τοῖς δ τοῦ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Ταρεήσιος τῆς Πατοῦτος τῆς Παοῦτος μητρὸς τοῦ προγεγραμμένου πατρὸς Ὥρου, ἀπέχειν καὶ μὴ ἐπικαλεῖν περὶ ὀφειλήματος συναλλαγμάτων Αἰγυπτίων καὶ Ἑλληνικῶν ἃ ἐξέτεισε Παοῦς

P.Adl. 20Poinkoris (Diopolites)99 BC

Ψενμεγχείους ὡς ἐτῶν λε μέσου … πάντες τῶν ἐκ τοῦ Παθυρίτου τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν τῶι πατρὶ τοῦ Ὥρου γῆν ἀρουρῶν … ἐν τῶι ἄνω πεδίωι Κροκοδίλων πόλεως ἀπὸ σφραγῖδος μιᾶς

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
τοῦho <the> G3588 Article · genitive · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
ΠοπλίουPoplios of Publius G4196 Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Publius was a Roman, possibly a governor, who showed kindness to Paul in Acts 28:7-8.
Tyndale gloss
Publius
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Πόπλιος (Poplios) is a proper name, equivalent to the Latin 'Publius.' It refers to a Roman individual mentioned in Acts 28:7-8, identified as a chief magistrate on the island of Melita. The entries suggest that while Publius was a common name, his specific identity and role are not well-documented beyond this biblical reference.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Πόπλιος, -ου, ὁ

(Latin), Publius: Ac 28:7, 8.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

Πόπλιος, -ov, ὁ, Publius (a Roman name), the name of a chief magistrate [(Grk. ὁ πρῶτος) but see Dr. Woolsey’s addition to the art. ‘Publius’ in B. D. (Am. ed.) ] of the island of Melita; nothing more is known of him: Acts XXvilli. 7, 8.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

Πόπλιος. Ramsay (7 απ, p. 343) points out that Πόπλιος (Ac 2871.) is the Greek form of the /vaexomen Publius, and that though it is not usual that an official should be called by his praenomen simply, ‘‘ Publius’’ may have been so well known among the peasantry that Luke adopted their familiar mode of addressing him.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Πόπλιος (Poplios) — Publius.

Πόπλιος, -ου, ὁ

(Latin), Publius: Act.28:7-8.†

(From Abbott-Smith. LSJ has no entry)

Strong's Greek Dictionary

∏όπλιος

Poplios

of Latin origin; apparently "popular"; Poplius (i.e. Publius), a

Roman:--Publius.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Πόπλιος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

Publius

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Πόπλιος Poplios 2x

Publius, pr. name, Acts 28:7, 8*

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

pub'-li-us (Poplios, from the Latin praenomen Publius, derived from populus, "popular"; according to Ramsay it is the Greek form of the Latin nomen Popilius; the Greek title meaning "first," applied to Publius in Ac 28:7, was an official one, and has been found on an inscription from the island of Gaulus near Malta (compare Bockh, Corpus Inscriptionum Graecarum, number 5, 754)): Publius held office under the governor of Sicily. As the leading official in Malta, he was responsible for any Roman soldiers and their prisoners who might land there, but the account in Ac 28:7 implies that he displayed more than ordinary solicitude for Paul and his shipwrecked company, for, according to the writer, he "received us, and lodged us three days courteously" (the King James Version). The…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Publius

“the chief man of the island” of Malta (Acts 28:7), who courteously entertained Paul and his shipwrecked companions for three days, till they found a more permanent place of residence; for they remained on the island for three months, till the stormy season had passed. The word here rendered “chief man” (protos) is supposed by some to be properly a Maltese term, the official title of the governor.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

the chief man --probably the governor-of Melita, who received and lodged St. Paul and his companions on the occasion of their being shipwrecked off that island. (Acts 28:7) (A.D.55.)

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The prefect of Melita when Paul was shipwrecked on that island A. D. 60, Ac 28:7-9. Publius received the apostle and his company into his house, and entertained them with great humanity. The governor’s father, dangerously sick, and many others ill of various diseases, were miraculously healed; and their hospitable care of Paul and his friends continued through the three wintry months of their stay, and furnished them abundant supplies on their departure.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%publius
publius100% · 2×

2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ὄνομαname, character, rep
νῆσοςan island
Article the
πατήρfather, Father,
Πόπλιοςof Publius
what comes after →
ὅς
ἀναδέχομαιI welcome, recei
πυρετόςa fever
καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceΠόπλιος · 2× in the New Testament
Acts
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Embassy to Gaius 333c. AD 40

ἡμερωθεὶς οὖν ὅσα τῷ δοκεῖν ἀποκρίσεων χρηστοτέρων Ἀγρίππαν ἠξίωσε, τὸ ἀνωτάτω καὶ μέγιστον δωρούμενος, τὸ μηκέτι γενέσθαι τὴν ἀνάθεσιν· καὶ Ποπλίῳ Πετρωνίῳ, τῷ τῆς Συρίας ἐπιτρόπῳ, κελεύει γραφῆναι μηδὲν ἐπὶ τῷ ἱερῷ τῶν Ἰουδαίων ἔτι νεώτερον κινεῖν.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 14.217c. AD 75–95

Μετὰ δὲ τὸν Γαΐου θάνατον Μᾶρκος Ἀντώνιος καὶ Πόπλιος Δολαβέλλας ὕπατοι ὄντες τήν τε σύγκλητον συνήγαγον καὶ τοὺς παρʼ Ὑρκανοῦ πρέσβεις παραγαγόντες διελέχθησαν περὶ ὧν ἠξίουν καὶ φιλίαν πρὸς αὐτοὺς ἐποίησαν, καὶ πάντα συγχωρεῖν αὐτοῖς ἡ σύγκλητος…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Ryl. 2 127Euhemeria (ArsinoitesAD 29

ἐπιστάτῃ φυλακιτῶν παρὰ Σενθεῦτος τοῦ ανουβίωνος τῶν ἀπὸ Διονυσιάδος καταγεινομένου ἐν τοῖς ἀμμίνοις ἐποικίου Ποπλίου καὶ Γαίου Πετρωνίων. νυκτὶ τῇ φερούσῃ εἰς τὴν ιζ τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος μηνὸς Σεβαστοῦ τοῦ

P.Oxy. 49 3484OxyrhynchosAD 27–AD 33

δραχμῶν … ἀφʼ ὧν αὐτόθεν ὁμολογοῦσι οἱ νεναυλωκότες … … ῖρις καὶ Γάϊος καὶ Πόπλιος ἔχειν παρὰ τοῦ … ἐν Ὀξυρύγχων πόλει διὰ χειρὸς ἐξ οἴκου … ου δραχμὰς

P.Oxy. 2 249OxyrhynchosAD 80

ὧν προαπεγραψάμην καὶ νῦν τὸ κατηντηκὸς εἴς με ἐξ ὀνόματος τοῦ ὁμογνησίου μου ἀδελφοῦ Ποπλίου τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως μετηλλαχότος ἀτέκνου τῶι ι ἔτει θεοῦ Οὐεσπασιανοῦ ἐν τῇ

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
πυρετοῖςpuretos with fevers G4446 Noun · dative · plural · masculine
6× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Fever is a medical condition of inflammation, like the one Jesus heals in Matthew 8:15 and Mark 1:31. It can be a high fever, as in Luke 4:38.
Amplified meaning
a high temperature, inflammation
Tyndale gloss
fever
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πυρετός (i.e., *pyretos*) means 'fever' and is derived from the root for 'fire' (πῦρ). It appears in several New Testament passages, including Matthew 8:15 and Mark 1:31. The term can also refer to 'fiery heat' in a broader sense, but its primary usage in the New Testament is as a noun for fever.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πυρετός, -οῦ, ὁ

(< πῦρ),

[in LXX: De 28:22 (קדַּחַת)*;]

a fever: Mt 8:15, Mk 1:31, Lk 4:39, Jo 4:52, Ac 28:8; π. μέγας, a high fever: Lk 4:38 (on the technical phrase here, v. MM, xxii).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πυρετός, -ov, ὁ, (πῦρ); 1. fiery heat (Hom. Il. 22, 31 [but interpreters now give it the sense of ‘fever’ in this pass.; ef. Hbeling, Lex. Hom. s. v.; Schmidt, Syn. ch. 60 ὃ 147). 2. fever: Mt. viii. 15; Mk. i. 31; Lk. iv. 39; Jn. iv. 52; Acts xxviii. 8, (Hippoer., Arstph., Plat., sqq.; Deut. xxviii. 22); mup. μέγας, Lk. iv. 38 (as Galen de different. feb. 1, 1 says σύνηθες τοῖς ἰατροῖς ὀνομάζειν . - - τὸν μέγαν τε καὶ μικρὸν πυρετόν ; [cf. Wetstein on Lk. 1. ¢.]).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πυρετός (puretos) — fever.

πῠρετ-ός, ὁ,

(πῦρ) burning heat, fiery heat, φέρει πυρετὸν δειλοῖσι βροτοῖσιν (i.e. Sirius) [Refs 8th c.BC+]

II. fever, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θνήσκειν ἐκ π. [Refs]; π. ἀμφημερινοί, τριταῖοι, τεταρταῖοι, quotidian, tertian, quartan fevers, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

πυρετός

puretos

from 4445; inflamed, i.e. (by implication) feverish (as noun,

fever):--fever.

see GREEK for 4445

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πυρετός, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

a fever

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πυρετός pyretos 6x

scorching and noxious heat; a fever, Mt. 8:15; Mk. 1:31

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πυρετός πυ^ρετός, οῦ, ὁ, πῦρ burning heat, fiery heat, Il.

feverish heat, a fever, Ar., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DPM — Noun · dative · plural · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
83%fever
fever83% · 5×fevers17% · 1×

6 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject50%adverbial33%object17%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 6 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςἐπιτιμάωI rebuke, chide,
συνέχωI press together, co
εἰμίI am, exist
ΠόπλιοςPublius
Article the
πυρετόςwith fevers
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγείρωI wake, arouse, διακονέωI wait at table,ἀφίημιI send away, rel
μέγας
καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπυρετός · 6× in the New Testament
Luke Acts John Matthew Mark
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 13.398c. AD 75–95

Μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα ὁ βασιλεὺς Ἀλέξανδρος ἐκ μέθης εἰς νόσον καταπεσὼν καὶ τρισὶν ἔτεσιν τεταρταίῳ πυρετῷ συσχεθεὶς οὐκ ἀπέστη τῶν στρατειῶν, ἕως οὗ τοῖς πόνοις ἐξαναλωθεὶς ἀπέθανεν ἐν τοῖς Γερασηνῶν ὅροις πολιορκῶν Ῥάγαβα φρούριον πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD
P.Wash.Univ. 2 108OxyrhynchosAD 501–AD 600

ὀνείρων σε … παρακαλῶ διὰ τάχους ἀποστεῖλαί μοι γράμματα … τὴν καρδίαν μου ὁ πυρετὸς τῆς ἐρωτικῆς μανίας … λαμπάσιν ἡ Ἀφροδίτη ἓν βέλος ης

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
δυσεντερίῳdusenteria with dysentery G1420 Noun · dative · singular · feminine
1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Refers to a severe intestinal illness, described in Acts 28:8 as a 'bloody flux' that afflicted a man on the island of Malta.
Amplified meaning
a severe intestinal illness, bloody flux
Tyndale gloss
dysentery
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δυσεντέριον refers to dysentery, a bowel condition characterized by severe diarrhea. It is derived from roots related to the intestines and appears in Acts 28:8, where it is noted that the term is used in a neuter form. The lexicons generally agree on its meaning, with some variations in the form and references.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

* δυσεντερία, -ας, ἡ,

Rec. for δυσεντέριον (q.v.), Ac 28:8.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δυσεντερία, -as, 7, (ἔντερον intestine), dysentery, (Lat. tormina intestinorum, bowei-complaint): Acts xxviii. ἃ RG; see the foll. word. (Hippocr. and med. writ.; Hat., Plat., Aristot., Polyb., al.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δυσεντέριον. Moeris, p. 120, δυσεντερία, θηλυκῶς, ᾿Αττικῶς. δυσεντέριον, “Ἑλληνικῶς, seitles the form in Ac 288, where all the uncials have the neuter. If Hobart’s long list of citations (Ρ. 52 f.) can be trusted for this detail, Luke’s medical books all presented him with δυσεντερία (-(y Hippocrates), and his faithfulness to the spoken Hellenistic form is the more noteworthy. We have not noticed the word in the medical documents among the papyri : it would be a fortunate chance if any of these scattered papers dealt with this particular subject. Part II. 3 δωδέκατος

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δυσεντερία (dusenteria) — dysentery.

δῠσεντερ-ία, ἡ,

dysentery, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

δυσεντέριον

dusenteria

from 1418 and a comparative of 1787 (meaning a bowel); a

"dysentery":--bloody flux.

see GREEK for 1418

see GREEK for 1787

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δυσεντερία, ας, ἡ

n.f.

dysentery

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δυσεντέριον dysenterion 1x

dysentery, Acts 28:8*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δυσεντερία δυσ-εντερία, ἡ, ἔντερον dysentery, Hdt., Plat.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DSF — Noun · dative · singular · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

dis'-en-ter-i (dusenteria):

In Ac 28:8 the Revised Version (British and American) uses this word in place of the phrase "bloody flux" of the King James Version to describe the disease by which the father of Publius was affected in Malta at the time of Paul's shipwreck. The acute form of this disease is often attended with high temperature, hence, Luke speaks of it as "fever and dysentery" (puretois kai dusenteria).

The disease is still occasionally epidemic in Malta where there have been several bad outbreaks among the garrison in the last century, and it has proved to be an intractable and fatal disease there. It is due to parasitic microbe, the Bacillus dysenteriae. In 2Ch 21:19 there is reference to an epidemic of a similar nature in the days of Jehoram. The malady, as predicted…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ General scriptures concerning Ac 28:8

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%dysentery
dysentery100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Concordanceδυσεντέριον · 1× in the New Testament
Acts
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
συνεχόμενονsunechō oppressed G4912 Verb · present · passive · participle · accusative · singular · masculine
12× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To hold or oppress someone, like keeping them in a tight spot, as in Luke 8:45 and 19:43. It can also mean to constrain or press someone, making them feel trapped. This word is about being in a difficult situation.
Tyndale gloss
to hold/oppress
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

συνέχω (sunecho) means to hold together or confine, and it can refer to physical restraint, such as closing ears (Acts 7:57), or to emotional or mental pressure, as in being compelled or afflicted. The word is built from the prefix συν- (together) and the root ἔχω (to have). It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, including instances of being seized by illness (Matthew 4:24) and the emotional state of being pressed by circumstances (Philippians 1:23).

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

συν-έχω

[in LXX for עצר, חבר, etc. ;]

to hold together (τ. συνέχον τ. πάντα, Wi 1:7): of closing the ears, Ac 7:57 (τ. στόμα, Is 52:15); to hem in, press on every side: Lk 8:45 19:43.

to hold fast;

of a prisoner, to hold in charge (Luc.; cf. exx. in Deiss., BS, 160; MM, xxiv): Lk 22:63;

to constrain: II Co 5:14; pass., Lk 12:50, Ac 18:5 (τ. λόγῳ; cf. Field, Notes, 128), Phl 1:23; in pass., of ills, to be seized or afflicted by, suffering from:

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

συνέχω. (1) For the literal meaning of this word ‘‘hold together,” “keep together,” cf. P Cairo Zen II. 591555 (B.c. 256) μὴ πλείους δὲ πέντε ἡμερῶν σύσχηις TO ὕδωρ, with reference to not keeping a piece of land flooded for more than five days; P Tebt 11. 4ro™ (a.p. 16) ἐρωτῶ σε ταχύτερον συσχεῖν τί] πρᾶγμα, “1 beg you to close the matter with all speed” (Edd.); and 74. 3907 (a.p. 167) ᾿Οννῶφρις συν[έχ]ω τὰς δραχμὰς ἐγατὸν εἴκοσι τέσσαρ[ας, “IT Onnophris have received the 124 drachmae,” in connexion with a loan on mortgage. (2) With the usage of the verb in Lk 228 of the officers who held Jesus zz charge Deissmann (8S p. 160) compares P Petr II. 201-10 (B.c. 252) where in an official minute we read of certain sailors who went to Herakleopolis, καὶ συν[έϊσχεν αὐτοὺς Ἡρακλείδης ὃ ἀρχιφυλακίτης, “and Herakleides, the chief of the police, arrested them.” Add for the same sense P Magd 427…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

συνέχω (sunechō) — to hold/oppress.

συνέχω,

aorist συνέσχον:—middle, future συνέξομαι in passive sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, aorist συνεσχέθην [Refs 4th c.BC+]: future infinitive συσχεθήσεσθαι [Refs 1st c.BC+] W.:—hold or keep together, confine, secure, ὅθι ζωστῆρος ὀχῆες χρύσειοι σύνεχον [θώρηκα] [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἵνα τε ξυνέχουσι τένοντες ἀγκῶνος where the sinews of the elbow hold [it] together, [Refs]meet, see below [Refs]; Ὠκεανός.. συνεῖχε σάκος enclosed, compassed it, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Αἴτνα σ. [Τυφῶνα] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὼ μηρὼ σ. hold them together, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; συνέσχον τὰ ὦτα αὐτῶν closed or stopped their ears, [NT]; μηδὲ συσχέτω ἐπ᾽ ἐμὲ φρέαρ τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ let not the pit close its mouth upon me, [LXX]; τὸ δέρμα σ. [τὰ ὀστᾶ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἄτλας ἅπαντα σ[LXX]passive, τὸ λεγόμενον ἐν φρέατι συσχόμενος” trapped in a well, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

συνέχω

sunecho

from 4862 and 2192; to hold together, i.e. to compress (the ears, with

a crowd or siege) or arrest (a prisoner); figuratively, to compel,

perplex, afflict, preoccupy:--constrain, hold, keep in, press, lie

sick of, stop, be in a strait, straiten, be taken with, throng.

see GREEK for 4862

see GREEK for 2192

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

συνέχω

v.

I press together, confine, compel, am afflicted with

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

συνέχω synechō 12x

pr. to hold together; to confine, shut up, close; τὰ ὦτα, to stop the ears, Acts 7:57; to confine, as a besieged city, Lk. 19:43; to hold, hold fast, have the custody of any one, Lk. 22:63; to hem in, urge, press upon, Lk. 8:45; to exercise a constraining influence on, 2 Cor. 5:14; pass. to be seized with, be affected with, as fear, disease, etc., Mt. 4:24; Lk. 4:38; 8:37; Acts 28:8; to be in a state of mental constriction, to be hard…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

συνέχω fut. ξω aor2 συνέσχον fut. mid. in pass. sense, Dem. to hold or keep together, Il.: to enclose, encompass, embrace, Hes., Plat.

to keep together, keep from dispersing, of soldiers, Xen., Dem.: —then, ς. πόλιν to keep the state together, keep it from falling to pieces, Eur.; καὶ θεοὺς καὶ ἀνθρώπους ἡ κοινωνία ξ. Plat.; ς. τὴν πολιτείαν Dem.; so, ξ.τὴν εἰρεσίαν to keep the rowers together, make them pull in time, Thuc.

to constrain or force one to a thing, NTest.

to compress, oppress, id. NTest.: Pass. to be constrained, oppressed, afflicted, Hdt., attic

intr. to meet, εἰς ἕν Arist.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PPP-ASM — Verb · present · passive · participle · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PPP-ASM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Passive Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
8%they held
they held8% · 1×occupied8% · 1×oppressed8% · 1×compels8% · 1×i am pressed8% · 1×oppressing8% · 1×oppressed with8% · 1×they were seized8% · 1×other renderings33% · 4×

12 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 12 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
μέγας
φόβοςfear, terror, reφωνήa sound, noise,
βάσανοςtorture, torment
καίand, even, also,
εἰμίI am, exist
ΣίμωνSimon
ὄχλοςa crowd
Article the
πῶς
καίand, even, also,
συνέχωoppressed12×
what comes after →
αὐτός
δέbut, on the otheἐμπαίζωI mock
σύ
καίand, even, also,πάντοθενfrom all sides
Article the
οὖςthe earλόγοςa word, speech,
δαιμονίζομαιI am demon-possessed
καίand, even, also,
πυρετόςa fever
μέγας

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσυνέχω · 12× in the New Testament
Luke Acts 2 Corinthians Matthew Philippians
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 26 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaOn Husbandry 40c. AD 40

στοχάζονται δὲ οὐδὲν ἧττον καὶ τοῦ μὴ διασπασθεῖσαν αὐτὴν σποράδην διασκεδασθῆναι, φόβον ἐπανατεινόμενοι τὸν σωφρονιστὴν τῶν λόγῳ μηδέποτε πειθομένων καὶ κολάσει χρώμενοι συνεχεῖ, μετρίᾳ μὲν κατὰ τῶν ἰάσιμα νεωτεριζόντων, ἀφορήτῳ δὲ κατὰ τῶν ἀνίατα·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.3c. AD 75–95

καὶ αὐτόθι τεταλαιπωρημένοι τῷ τε συνεχεῖ τῆς ὁδοιπορίας καὶ τῇ τῆς τροφῆς ἀπορίᾳ, καὶ γὰρ τότʼ αὐτοὺς τελείως ἐπιλελοίπει, κατάγονται·

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Heid. 4 298Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 104

κατακεχώρισται ἔτους η Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Νέρουα Τραιανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Δακικοῦ Χοιὰκ ιζ Φᾶσις λαογράφος συνέσχον … … … … vestiges Σισόις vestiges vestiges

P. Münch. 3 96Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 158

ἐν μηνὶ Παῦνι τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος ἔτους καθὼς πρόκιται. Σαραπίων ἔγραψα τὰ πλεῖστα. Ἰσχυρίων Ἡρώδου συνέσχον καὶ συναποδώσω τὰς δραχμὰς τὰς ἑκατὸν ὀκτὼ καθὼς πρόκειται.

P.Tebt. 2 390Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 167

τὴν ἄρουραν μίαν ἥμισυ ἀντὶ τόκου, πρὸς ἡμᾶς ὄντων τῶν δημοσίων καθὼς πρόκειται. Ὀννῶφρις συνέχω τὰς δραχμὰς ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι τέσ-Xσαρας καὶ συναποδώσω καθὼς πρόκιται. Σαραπάμμων συνέχω τὰς δραχμὰς ἑκατὸν

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
κατακεῖσθαι·katakeimai [was] lying; G2621 Verb · present · no voice stated · infinitive
12× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This verb means to lie down or recline, often for a meal or due to illness. In Mark 2 and Luke 5, it describes people reclining at Jesus' table.
Amplified meaning
afflicted, suffering
Tyndale gloss
to recline
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κατάκειμαι (katakeimai) means to lie down or recline, often in the context of being sick or resting. It can also refer to reclining at meals, as seen in several New Testament passages like Mark 1:30 and Luke 5:25. The word is built from the prefix κατά and the root κεῖμαι. Some entries note its use in various contexts, including lying idle or stored up, but no significant disagreements among lexicons are present.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κατά-κειμαι,

[in LXX: Pr 6:9 23:34 (שׁכב), Jth 13:15, Wi 17:7*;]

to lie down.

to lie sick: Mk 1:30 2:4, Jo 5:6, Ac 28:8; seq. ἐπί c. gen., Ac 9:33; id. c. acc., Lk 5:25; ἐν, Jo 5:3.

to recline at meals (cf. ἀνάκειμαι): Mk 14:3, Lk 5:29; seq. ἐν, Mk 2:15, Lk 7:37, I Co 8:10.†

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κατάκειμαι. For this verb used of one ill, as in Mk 189 a/., cf. P Ryl II. 685 (B.C. 89) [ore] διὰ τὰς πληγὰς ἀρρωστήσασα (/. --σαν) κατακεῖσαι (/. -κεῖσθαι) κινδυνεύρυσα (1. - σαν) τῶι βίωι, ‘the blows caused me to be laid up with sickness and my life is endangered ’’ (Edd.), P Tebt II. 422° (iii/A.D.) kataκιται, ‘‘she is laid up,’’ and see Field Mores, p. 25. The , κατακλαω word has a technical significance in P Oxy VII. 1040%* (a.D. 225) κύρια [τὰ γ]ράμματα δισσὰ γραφέντα ὡς ἐν [δ]ημοσίῳ κατακείμενα, ‘this bond, which is written in duplicate, is valid as if publicly registered” (Ed.), 73. X. 12571 (iii/A.D.) τῷ kar ἄνδρα τῷ ἐν δίη)μοσ[ίῳ κατα]κειμένῳ, “to the individual list lodged in the archives” (Edd.). See also P Strass I. 4129 (A.D. 250) δύο ταλάντ]ων παρ᾽ ἐκείνῳ κ[ατ]ακειμένων, “‘indem die zwei Talente bei ihm beruhten” (Ed.), and the contracted karak in Meyer Ostr 767 (A.D.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κατάκειμαι (katakeimai) — to recline.

κατάκειμαι,

Epic dialect 3rd.pers. plural κατακείαται [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Ionic dialect pluperfect κατεκέατο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; subjunctive -κέωμαι[Refs 5th c.BC+] —passive, only in present and imperfect with future middle -κείσομαι:—lie down, μῆλα τὰ δὴ κατάκειτ᾽ ἐσφαγμένα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπὶ πλευρὰς κ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; νέκυς κ. [Refs 7th c.BC+]

2. lie hid, ἐν λόχμῃ.. κατέκειτο μέγας σῦς [Refs 8th c.BC+]

3. lie stored up, δοιοὶ γάρ τε πίθοι κατακείαται ἐν Διὸς οὔδει [Refs 8th c.BC+]

3. b to be deposited, of deeds in a registry, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

4. lie sick, keep one's bed, [NT+5th c.BC+]; lie in bed, [NT+5th c.BC+]

5. lodge, reside, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

κατάκειμαι

katakeimai

from 2596 and 2749; to lie down, i.e. (by implication) be sick;

specially, to recline at a meal:--keep, lie, sit at meat (down).

see GREEK for 2596

see GREEK for 2749

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κατάκειμαι

v.

I recline, am lying ill

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κατάκειμαι katakeimai 12x

to lie, be in a recumbent position, be laid down, Mk. 1:30; 2:4; Lk. 5:25; Jn. 5:3, 6; Acts 9:33; 28:8; to recline at table, Mk. 2:15; 14:3; Lk. 5:29; 7:37; 1 Cor. 8:10*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

κατάκειμαι epic 3rd pl. κατακείαται ionic -κέαται subj. -κέωμαι Pass., only in pres. and imperf. fut. mid. -κείσομαι to lie down, lie outstretched, Hom., Ar.; κατακείω used as fut. of κατάκειμαι κατακείετε οἴκαδ᾽ ἰόντες, Od.; σπείσαντες κατακείομεν (epic for -κείωμεν), id. Od.; κακκείοντες ἔβαν (epic part.) they went to lie down, Hom.

to lie hid, lurk, Hom.

to lie stored up, Lat. reponi, Il., Hes.

to lie sick, Hdt.:— also to lie idle, Xen.

to recline at meals, Lat. accumbere, πῖνε, κατάκεισο Ar.

of land, to lie sloping to the sea (so Hor. Usticae cubantis), Pind.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PNN — Verb · present · no voice stated · infinitive
present no voice stated infinitive — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PNN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: middle or passive depoNent Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5738

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

li'-ing.

See LIE.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Lying spirit from God 1Ki 22:21-23; 2Ch 18:20-22

→ See FALSEHOOD

→ See HYPOCRISY

Torrey's New Topical Textbook

- Forbidden

Le 19:11; Col 3:9

- Hateful to God

Pr 6:16-19

- An abomination to God

Pr 12:22

- A hindrance to prayer

Isa 59:2,3

- The devil, the father of

Joh 8:44

- The devil excites men to

1Ki 22:22; Ac 5:3

- SAINTS

. Hate

Ps 119:163; Pr 13:5

. Avoid

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
42%lying
lying42% · 5×reclining17% · 2×eating8% · 1×laying sick8% · 1×when is reclining8% · 1×he was lying8% · 1×reclines back8% · 1×

12 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 12 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ΣίμωνSimon
πενθεράa mother-in-law
παραλυτικόςafflicted with paral
Article the
γίνομαιI come into being, a
καίand, even, also,
λεπρόςa leper
Article the
ὅς
ἐπί
κατάκειμαι[was] lying;12×
what comes after →
αὐτός
ἐνἔρχομαιI come, go
πυρέσσωI am sick with a fev
καίand, even, also,
ἀπέρχομαιI come or go away fr
εἰς
ἐν
Article the
πλῆθοςa multitude
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκατάκειμαι · 12× in the New Testament
Mark Luke Acts John 1 Corinthians
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn Dreams 2.265c. AD 40

ἔστι δὲ καὶ τούτου δεῖγμα τὸ ἐν ταῖς ἱεραῖς ἀναγραφαῖς κατακείμενον, τὸ „κύριος πολεμήσει ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν, καὶ ὑμεῖς σιγήσεσθε“ (Exod.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 6.214c. AD 75–95

ἐπεὶ δὲ πάλιν αὐτὸν προσελθὸν τὸ δαιμόνιον ἐθορύβει πνεῦμα καὶ συνετάραττε, καλέσας εἰς τὸ δωμάτιον ἐν ᾧ κατέκειτο κατέχων τὸ δόρυ προσέταξε τῷ ψαλμῷ καὶ τοῖς ὕμνοις ἐξᾴδειν αὐτόν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. BC 7th c. AD
P.Oslo 3 107AD 101–AD 125

οἰκονομίας μὴ διεστρῶσθαι τὸν Ψενοσῖριν Φο … μητρὸς Θενφατρῆτος Θενπνεφερῶτα Ψεντασεῦτος μητρὸς Θενφατρῆτος μηδὲ κατακεῖσθαι. καὶ τῇ α ἐπαγομένων τοῦ αὐτοῦ β ἔτους διʼ ἀγορανόμων μητροπόλεως ἡ Ταυσῖρις μετὰ

P.Stras. 4 256Selilais (Hermopolites)AD 132

τε χειρόγραφον τοῦτο κύριον ἔστω πάντῃ ἐπιφερόμενον καὶ παντὶ τῷ ἐπιφέροντι ὡς ἐν δημοσίῳ κατακείμενον. ἔτους ιϛ Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Τραιανοῦ Ἁδριανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Μεχὶρ κθ Ἑρμαῖος Ἑρμαίου ὁ καὶ τὸ

Stud.Pal. 22 69Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 186–AD 187

τόδε τὸ χειρόγραφον δισσὸν ἐγράφη χωρὶς ἄλλων ὧν ὀφείλω σοι κύριον ὡς ἐν δημοσίῳ κατακείμενον … ἔτους κζ Μάρκου Αὐρηλίου Κομμόδου Ἀντωνίνου Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
πρὸςpros to G4314 Preposition
700× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A preposition showing direction or relationship, like towards or with something, as seen in Mark 5:11 and John 18:16. This means indicating movement or direction. It's about showing proximity or connection.
Tyndale gloss
to/with
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πρός is a preposition that indicates direction, proximity, or relation. It can be used with the genitive to denote motion from a place, with the dative for local proximity, and with the accusative to express motion towards a place or object. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as Acts 27:34 for benefit and Mark 5:11 for proximity.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πρός,

prep. c. gen., dat., acc.

C. gen., of motion from a place, from the side of, hence metaph., in the interests of, Ac 27:34 (cf. Page, in l.).

C. dat., of local proximity, hard by, near, at: Mk 5:11, Lk 19:37, Jo 18:16 20:11, 12, Re 1:13.

C. acc., of motion or direction towards a place or object, to, towards.

Of place,

after verbs of motion or of speaking and other words with the idea of direction: ἔρχομαι, ἀναβαίνω, πορεύομαι, λέγω, ἐπιστολή, etc., Mt 3:14, Mk 6:51, Lk 11:5, Jo 2:3,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πρός, a preposition, i.q. Epic mpori, from πρό and the adverbial suffix τι, (cf. the German vor . . . hin [Curtius § 381]); it is joined I. with the AccusaTIvE, to, towards, Lat. ad, denoting direction towards athing, or position and state looking towards a thing (W. § 49h. p. 404 (378)): it is used 1. of the goal or limit towards which a movement is directed: πρός twa or τι, a. prop. after verbs of going, departing, running, coming, ete.: ἄγω, Jn. xi. 15; ἀναβαίνω, Mk. vi. 51; Jn. xx. 17; Acts xv. 2; ἀνακάμπτω, Mt. ii. 12; Acts xvili. 21; ἀνέρχομαι, Gal. i. 17 [1]. Tr mrg. arépy.]; ἀπέρχομαι, Mt. » xiv. 25 [Rec.]; Mk. iii. 13, etc.; πρὸς ἑαυτόν, to his house, Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Trbr. WH reject the ys.; Tr reads mp. αὐτόν ; some connect the phrase w. θαυμάζων (see 2 Ὁ. below) ]; Jn. xx. 10 [Ὁ Tr αὐτούς, WH air. (cf. s. v. αὑτοῦ sub fin.)]; γίνεσθαι πρός τινα, to come to one, 1 Co.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πρός reference to place PSI IV. 31178 (iv/A.D.?) πρ]ὸς τὴν Aavitk.ay τῆς κοίλης Dupials. Headlam (on Herodas VII. 123) holds that τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν in Mk 2? ‘‘is surely idiomatic (not vulgar as Moulton thinks) ‘spots which commanded the door’”: cf. Mt 310, Lk 35. For πρός, ‘‘with,” as in Jn ΤΡ, Heb 41%, cf. Epict. iv. 9. 13 πρὸς ὃν οὐδείς ἐστί σου πιθανώτερος (see Sharp Ξε, p. 92). And for the possibility that the difficult πρός in Mk 63, οἷ", 14%, Jn 1}, 1 Jn 1?, is to be explained as an Aramaism, see Rendel Harris Prologue to S. John’s Gospel p. 8f., and Burney Avamaic Origin of the Fourth Gospel p. 28 f. (6) of time = ‘‘for’’ (a time) and no longer—BGU I. 1131? (A.D. 143) βουλόμενος παρεπιδημεῖν πρὸς καιρόν (cf. Lk 818), P Oxy I. 6714 (A.D. 338) πρὸς ὀλίγον εἰσχύει, ‘‘withstands but for a short time” (cf. Jas 4), and P Flor III. 282° (A.D. 520) πρὸς ὅλον χρόνον. (c) of mental…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πρός (pros) — to/with.

πρός,

preposition, expressing direction,

__A on the side of, in the direction of, hence with genitive, dative, and accusative, from, at, to: Epic dialect also προτί and ποτί, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] usually with accusative, more rarely with dative, and each only once with genitive, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—dialectal forms: Doric dialectποτί (which see) and ποί, but Cretan dialect πορτί [Refs], Argive προτ(ί) [Refs 7th c.BC+] πός [Refs 4th c.BC+]., also sometimes in Asia Minor in compounds, see at {ποσάγω},{ποσφέρω}; Aeolic dialect πρός [Refs 7th c.BC+]; πρές [Refs 6th c.AD+]; Pamphylian περτ (ί) [Refs] (With προτί, πρός cf. Sanskrit práti 'towards, near to, against, back, etc.', Slavonic protiv[ucaron], Lett. pret 'against', Latin pretium: ποτί (which see) and πός are not cognate) [Refs 4th c.BC+] refers to that from which something…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πρός

pros

a strengthened form of 4253; a preposition of direction; forward to,

i.e. toward (with the genitive case, the side of, i.e. pertaining to;

with the dative case, by the side of, i.e. near to; usually with the

accusative case, the place, time, occasion, or respect, which is the

destination of the relation, i.e. whither or for which it is

predicated):--about, according to , against, among, at, because of,

before, between, (where-)by, for, X at thy house, in, for intent, nigh

unto, of, which pertain to, that, to (the end that), X together, to

(you) -ward, unto, with(-in). In the comparative case, it denotes

essentially the same applications, namely, motion towards, accession

to, or nearness at.

see GREEK for 4253

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πρός

Prep.

to, towards, with

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πρός pros 700x

from; met. for the benefit of, Acts 27:34; with a dative, near, by, at, by the side of, in the vicinity of, Mk. 5:11; Lk. 19:37; with an accusative, used of the place to which anything tends, to, unto, towards, Mt. 2:12; 3:5, 13; at, close upon, Mt. 3:10; Mk. 5:22; near to, in the vicinity of, Mk. 6:45; after verbs of speaking, praying, answering to a charge, etc., to, Mt. 3:15; 27:14; of place where, with, in, among, by, at, etc., Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πρός prep. with gen., implying motion from a place; with dat., abiding at a place; with acc., motion to a place

WITH GEN.,

of Place, from, from forth, Hom., Soph.

on the side or quarter of, νήσοισι πρὸς Ἤλιδος islands looking (as it were) from Elis, i. e. towards Elis, Od.; πρὸς τοῦ Ἑλλησπόντου ἵδρυται μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ Στρύμονος lies more towards (i. e. nearer) the Hellespont than the Strymon, Hdt.; ἐστρατοπεδεύοντο πρὸς Ὀλύνθου Thuc., etc.:—often with words denoting the points of the compass, δύω θύραι εἰσίν, αἱ μὲν πρὸς βορέαο, αἱ δ᾽ αὖ πρὸς νότου one looking north wards, the other south wards, Od.; so, οἰκέουσι πρὸς νότου ἀνέμου Hdt., etc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
69%to
to69% · 506×with7% · 48×for6% · 42×toward4% · 30×against3% · 21×at3% · 20×unto2% · 18×other renderings5% · 37×other renderings1% · 10×

732 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 32 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial93%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 700 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἔρχομαιI come, go
καίand, even, also,Article theνύξthe night, night
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakArticle theπαραγίνομαιI appear, come,
αὐτός
ἄγωI leadφέρωI carry, bear, bμαθητήςa learner, disci
ἐγώ
ὑπέρσῶμαbody, fleshυἱόςa son, descenden
πρόςto700×
what comes after →
Article the
πατήρfather, Father, θεόςGod, a godμαθητήςa learner, disci
αὐτός
Article theλέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,
σύ
καίand, even, also,ἐνἔρχομαιI come, go
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,Article theοὐNeg
ἀλλήλων
τίςIrgλέγωI say, speakμήNeg

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπρός · 700× in the New Testament
Luke Acts John Mark Matthew 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Hebrews Romans Ephesians 1 Thessalonians Galatians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 3c. AD 40

ἡ δ’ ἀρχή, καθάπερ ἔφην, ἐστὶ θαυμασιωτάτη κοσμοποιίαν περιέχουσα, ὡς καὶ τοῦ κόσμου τῷ νόμῳ καὶ τοῦ νόμου τῷ κόσμῳ συνᾴδοντος καὶ τοῦ νομίμου ἀνδρὸς εὐθὺς ὄντος κοσμοπολίτου πρὸς τὸ βούλημα τῆς φύσεως τὰς πράξεις ἀπευθύνοντος, καθ’ ἣν καὶ ὁ σύμπας…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.4c. AD 75–95

τὸν μὲν γὰρ πρὸς τοὺς Ῥωμαίους πόλεμον ἡμῖν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις γενόμενον καὶ τὰς ἐν αὐτῷ πράξεις καὶ τὸ τέλος οἷον ἀπέβη πείρᾳ μαθὼν ἐβιάσθην ἐκδιηγήσασθαι διὰ τοὺς ἐν τῷ γράφειν λυμαινομένους τὴν ἀλήθειαν,

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.3c. AD 100

τούτων οὖν μενόντων τὰ πρὸς κύριον ἁγνῶς, συνευφραίνονται αὐτοῖς σοφία, σύνεσις, ἐπιστήμη, γνῶσις.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Grenf. 1 28Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)109 BC

r … πυρὸν νέον καθαρὸν ἄδολον μέτρωι ὧι καὶ παρείληφεν καὶ ἀποκαθεστάμενον εἰς οἶκον πρὸς αὐτὸν ἰδίοις ἀνηλώμασιν. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶι ἐν τῶι ὡρισμένωι χρόνωι ἢ μὴ ποιῆ

P.Amh. 2 48Pathyris107 BC

παρεχέτω τὸν οἶνον μόνιμον ἕως Ἁθὺρ λ τοῦ δεκάτου ἔτους, καὶ ἀποκαταστησάτω εἰς οἶκον πρὸς αὐτὴν τοῖς ἰδίοις. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῷ ἐν τῷ ὡρισμένῳ χρόνῳ ἀποτεισάτω ἑκάστου κεραμίου

P.Grenf. 1 30Pathyris104 BC

πᾶσι χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διὰ παντὸς εὐημερεῖν. ὑγιαίνομεν δὲ καὶ αὐτοί. μεταλαβόντες τοὺς συντετελεσμένους πρὸς τοὺς ἀσεβεῖς Ἑρμωνθίτας ἀγῶνας μεγάλως ἐχάρημεν. ἐπεὶ οὖν προκεχειρίκαμεν προστάτην τοῦ μεγίστου θεοῦ Νεχθφαραῦτος

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
ὃνhos, hē whom G3739 Relative pronoun · accusative · singular · masculine
1,407× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The word which is a pronoun used to ask for or identify something, as seen in John 5:11. It can also be used to describe a person or thing, such as in Mark 15:23. This word helps to clarify or specify what is being talked about.
Tyndale gloss
which
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ὅς is a pronoun meaning 'who,' 'which,' 'what,' or 'that.' It serves as both a demonstrative and a relative pronoun, agreeing in gender with its antecedent. The New Testament uses it in various constructions, including phrases like ὃς μὲν... ὃς δέ to indicate contrasting subjects. Notably, it can express purpose or cause in certain contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν).

As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, freq. in Plat.), Mk 15:23, Jo 5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mt 21:35 22:5 25:15, Lk 23:33, Ac 27:14, Ro 14:5, I Co 11:21, II Co 2:16, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mt 13:8, 23, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅς 455 ὅς iii. 5 [RG], 6; Heb. vi. 10; ix. 20; Jas. ii. 5; 1 In. iii. 24; Jude 15; for other exx. see below; ἐν ὥρᾳ 7 οὐ γινώoxet, Mt. xxiv. 50; τῇ παραδύσει 9 παρεδώκατε, Mk. vii. 13 ; add, Lk. ii. 20; v. 9; ix. 435 xii. 46; xxiv. 25; Jn. xvii. 5; Acts ii. 22; xvii. 31; xx. 38; 2 Co. xii. 21; 2Th.i. 4; Rev. xviii. 6; ef. W. § 24,1; [B. as above]. Rarely attraction oceurs where the verb governs the dative [but see below]: thus, κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσε θεοῦ for xarévavre θεοῦ, ᾧ ἐπίστευσε (See κατέναντι). Ro. iv. 17; φωνῆς, ἧς ἔκραξα (for 7 (al. ἥν, οἴ. W. 164 (154 sq.) Β. 287 (217)}7), Acts xxiv. 21, οἵ. Is. vi. 4; (7γετο δὲ καὶ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ τε πιστῶν, οἷς ἥδετο καὶ ὧν ἠπίστει πολλούς, for καὶ πολλοὺς τούτων, οἷς ἠπίστει, Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 4, 39; ὧν ἐγὼ ἐντετύχηκα οὐδείς; for οὐδεὶς τούτων, οἷς ἐντετ. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 ἃ.; Protag. p. 361 6.; derep.7 p.531e.; παρ᾽ ὧν βοηθεῖς, οὐδεμίαν λήψει…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ος is found as a demonstrative pronoun in P Ryl II. 14415 (complaint of assault—a.D. 38) ὃς δὲ ἐκ τοῦ ἐναντίου ἄλογον ἀηδίαν μοι ἐπιχειρήσας παρεχρήσατό μοι πολλὰ καὶ ἄσχημα, ‘“whereupon he opposing me made a brutal and odious attack upon me and subjected me to much shameful mishandling” (Edd.): cf. Mk 15%, Jn 51. For ὃς μέν... ὃς δέ, “the one . . the other,” as in Mt 21° a/., see P Oxy IX. 1189? (c. A.D. 117) ἐπιστολὰς δύο ds ἔγραψα ἣν μὲν σοὶ ἣν δὲ Σαβείνῳ, and for ὃς δέ solétarium see PSI. IV. 313° (iii/iv A.D.) with the editor’s note. Ὃς ἄν (ἐάν) c. conj. = ‘‘ whosoever ” may be illustrated Ly P Par 4622 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski*, p. 87), περὶ dv ἂν βούληι γράφε, P Grenf I. 30% (B.c. 103) ἐφ} οἷς ἂν οὖν ὑμῶν προσδέωνται, P Oxy IV. 743%% (B.C. 2) ἐν ols ἐὰν σοῦ προσδέηται, °° ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐὰν θέλῃς. For the comparative usage of ὃς ἄν and ὃς ἐάν, see Thackeray Gr. i. p. 68, cited s.v. ἄν.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅς (hos, hē) — which.

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

genitive οὗ, ἧς, οὗ, etc.; dative plural οἷς, αἷς, οἷς, etc.: Epic dialect forms, genitive ὅου (probably replacing Οο) in the phrases ὅου κλέος οὔ ποτ᾽ ὀλεῖται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; feminine ἕης [Refs 8th c.BC+]; elsewhere only ἧς [Refs]; dative plural οἷς, οἷσι, ᾗς, ᾗσι (never αἷς or αἷσι in [Refs 8th c.BC+] — _pronoun_ used,

__A as demonstrative by the side of οὗτος, ὅδε, and the Article ὁ, ἡ, τό: in post-Homeric Gr. this use survived only in a few special phrases.

__B as a Relat. by the side of the Article ὅ, ἥ, τό (see. ὁ, ἡ, τό, c):—this demonstrative and Relat. pronoun must not be confounded with the Possess. ὅς, ἥ, ὅν. (With Gr. Relat. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ cf. Sanskrit Relat. yas, yā, yad, Lithuanian jis, ji (he, she), Oslav. i, ja, je (he, she…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅς ἥ ὅ

hos

he hay, and neuter

ho ho

probably a primary word (or perhaps a form of the article 3588); the

relatively (sometimes demonstrative) pronoun, who, which, what,

that:--one, (an-, the) other, some, that, what, which, who(-m, -se),

etc. See also 3757.

see GREEK for 3588

see GREEK for 3757

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ

Rel.pr.

who, which, what, that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅς hos 1x

who, which, what, that, Mt. 1:16, 23, 25; in NT interrog. ἐφ’ ὅ, wherefore, why, Mt. 26:50; in NT ὅς μὲν ... ὅς δέ, for ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, Mt. 21:35; 2 Cor. 2:16

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Rel-ASM — Relative pronoun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

R-ASM Part of Speech: Relative pronoun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%which
which25% · 356×whom20% · 291×who17% · 238×that14% · 199×what8% · 117×whatever2% · 30×whose2% · 29×other renderings10% · 145×other renderings2% · 25×

1,430 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 60 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object40%subject29%adverbial26%indirect object3%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,407 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐν
ἡμέραa dayαὐτόςἵναin order that, s
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἔχωI have, hold, poυἱόςa son, descenden
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose,δοῦλος (II)
διά
ἐκεῖνοςΧριστόςanointed, the Meαὐτός
εἰς
καίand, even, also,ἐγώοἰκίαa house, househo
ὅςwhom1407×
what comes after →
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theμεθερμηνεύωI translate, intκαίand, even, also,
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existἔξεστι(ν)it is permitted,γινώσκωI come to know,
Article the
θεόςGod, a godυἱόςa son, descendenκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
καίand, even, also, nam
σύποιέωI do, makeαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
ἄνDisjἑξήκονταIndecτριάκονταIndec

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅς · 1,407× in the New Testament
Acts Luke John Matthew Romans Mark Hebrews Revelation 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Colossians Ephesians

22 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 33c. AD 40

ἵν’ οὖν μὴ αἰεὶ συμφερόμεναι στασιάζωσι καὶ πόλεμος ἀντ’ εἰρήνης ἐπικρατῇ τὴν ἀκοσμίαν ἐν κόσμῳ τιθείς, οὐ μόνον ἐχώρισε φῶς καὶ σκότος, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅρους ἐν μέσοις ἔθετο διαστήμασιν, οἷς ἀνεῖρξε τῶν ἄκρων ἑκάτερον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

πῶς τὸ Σοδομιτῶν ἔθνος θεὸς κατεστρέψατο χολωθεὶς αὐτοῖς ἐφ' οἷς ἡμάρτανον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.8c. AD 100

Μωϋσῆ Μωϋσῆ, κατάβηθι τὸ τάχος, ὅτι ἠνόμησεν ὁ λαός σου, οὓς ἐξήγαγες ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, καὶ συνῆκεν Μωϋσῆς καὶ ἔριψεν τὰς δύο πλάκας ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ: καὶ συνετρίβη αὐτῶν ἡ διαθήκη, ἵνα ἡ τοῦ ἠγαπημένου Ἰησοῦ ἐγκατασφραγισθῇ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν ἡμῶν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ Ψενανοῦπιν καὶ … … ελθεῖν ἐπὶ προ … ους καὶ γραψάτωσαν ἡμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐσπούδασας διὰ τὰς ἡμῶν παρακλήσεις καὶ ση

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

ἐδάνεισεν Ὧρος Ὥρου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως ὑποκλαστὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον πυροῦ ἀρτάβας τεσσαράκοντα ἓξ κριθῆς ἑξήκοντα ἐννέα , ἴσους ἀτόκους, ὧν ἀπόδοσιν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

τῆς ἐπιγονῆς τῶν ἐκ Παθύρεως ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον χαλκοῦ ταλάντων πέντε . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
ho <the> G3588 Article · nominative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
ΠαῦλοςPaulos Paul G3972 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
158× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Paul, originally named Saul, was a Roman apostle who wrote many letters in the New Testament, including Romans and 1 Corinthians. He is a key figure in the early Christian church.
Tyndale gloss
Paul
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Παῦλος (transliterated as Paulos) refers to Paul, a prominent figure in the New Testament, specifically the Apostle Paul. It is of Latin origin, meaning 'little,' and is used frequently in the Acts of the Apostles and the Epistles. The name also appears in reference to Sergius Paulus, a Roman proconsul mentioned in Acts 13:7.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Παῦλος, -ου, ὁ (Lat. Paulus),

Sergius Paulus: Ac 13:7.

the Apostle Paul (cf. Σαῦλος): Ac 13:9, and freq. throughout Ac., Ro 1:1, I Co 1:1, al., II Pe 3:15.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

Παῦλος. The designation Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος οἱ Ac 13° is fully discussed by Deissmann 4S, p. 313 ff., where it is shown that the Apostle was already in possession of the double name at the time referred to: cf. Ramsay Paw/, p. 81 ff. Elsewhere (Recent Discovery, p. 356) Ramsay suggests that Paul’s complete Roman name may have been “Ὁ. Julius Paullus,” in view of the frequent conjunction of the names Julius Paullus in Lycaonia. In the important letter on the Meletian Schism, P Lond 19145® (A.D. 3352), greetings are conveyed to Παῦλον τὸν ἀναγνώστην : the editor refers to a priest of the same name (ἀπὸ Tnévas) in 2. 191744 (c. A.D. 330-340), and to ὃ μακάριος Παῦλος in 74. 1919% (same date). The name is not uncommon in the inscrr., see e.g. Perg 374 A® (time of Augustus), where ’A. Καστρίκιος Παῦλος is included among the choristers of θεὸς Σεβαστὸς kal θεὰ Ρώμη in Pergamum: cf. Thieme…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Παῦλος (Paulos) — Paul.

Παῦλος, -ου, ὁ (Lat. Paulus),

1. Sergius Paulus: Act.13:7.

2. the Apostle Paul (cf. Σαῦλος): Act.13:9, and frequently throughout Ac., Rom.1:1, 1Co.1:1, al., 2Pe.3:15.

(From Abbott-Smith. LSJ has no entry)

Παῦλος (Paulos) — Paulus.

Παῦλος, -ου, ὁ (Lat. Paulus),

1. Sergius Paulus: Act.13:7.

2. the Apostle Paul (cf. Σαῦλος): Act.13:9, and frequently throughout Ac., Rom.1:1,

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

∏αῦλος

Paulos

of Latin origin; (little; but remotely from a derivative of 3973,

meaning the same); Paulus, the name of a Roman and of an

apostle:--Paul, Paulus.

see GREEK for 3973

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Παῦλος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

Paul

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Παῦλος Paulos 158x

Paulus, Paul, pr. name. (1) Paul, the Apostle, Acts 13:9, et al. freq. (2) Sergius Paulus, the deputy or proconsul of Cyprus, Acts 13:7

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Paul

=Saul (q.v.) was born about the same time as our Lord. His circumcision-name was Saul, and probably the name Paul was also given to him in infancy “for use in the Gentile world,” as “Saul” would be his Hebrew home-name. He was a native of Tarsus, the capital of Cilicia, a Roman province in the south-east of Asia Minor. That city stood on the banks of the river Cydnus, which was navigable thus far; hence it became a centre of extensive commercial traffic with many countries along the shores of the Mediterranean, as well as with the countries of central Asia Minor. It thus became a city distinguished for the wealth of its inhabitants.

Tarsus was also the seat of a famous university, higher in reputation even than the universities of Athens and Alexandria, the only others that then existed. Here Saul was born, and here he spent his youth, doubtless enjoying the best education…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(small, little). Nearly all the original materials for the life St. Paul are contained in the Acts of the Apostles and in the Pauline epistles. Paul was born in Tarsus, a city of Cilicia. (It is not improbable that he was born between A.D. 0 and A.D. 5.) Up to the time of his going forth as an avowed preacher of Christ to the Gentiles, the apostle was known by the name of Saul. This was the Jewish name which he received from his Jewish parents. But though a Hebrew of the Hebrews, he was born in a Gentile city. Of his parents we know nothing, except that his father was of the tribe of Benjamin, (Philemon 3:5) and a Pharisee, (Acts 23:6) that Paul had acquired by some means the Roman franchise ("I was free born,") (Acts 22:23)…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The distinguished "apostle of the Gentiles;" also called SAUL, a Hebrew name. He is first called Paul in Ac 13:12; and as some think, assumed this Roman name according to a common custom of Jews in foreign lands, or in honor of Sergius Paulus, Ac 13:7, his friend and an early convert. Both names however may have belonged to him in childhood. He was born at Tarsus in Cilicia, and inherited from his father the privileges of a Roman citizen. His parents belonged to the tribe of Benjamin, and brought up their son as "a Hebrew of the Hebrews," Php 3:5. Tarsus was highly distinguished for learning and culture, and the opportunities for improvement it afforded were no doubt diligently improved by Paul. At a suitable age he was sent to…

Hitchcock's Bible Names Dictionary

small; little

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
97%paul
paul97% · 159×other renderings3% · 5×

164 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject60%object18%adverbial15%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 158 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
δέbut, on the otheτότεthenτέDisj
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theἀνίστημιI raise up, set διαπονέομαιI am greatly tro
ἐγώ
δέbut, on the otheὁράωI see, look uponχάρινon account of
καίand, even, also, nam
ΒαρναβᾶςBarnabasArticle the
χείρa hand
ἐμόςArticle the
ΠαῦλοςPaul158×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theΒαρναβᾶςBarnabasΣιλᾶςSilas
Article the
λόγοςa word, speech, μαθητήςa learner, disciσυνέδριονa council, the S
λέγωI say, speak
διάArticle theθέλωI will, wish, de
ἀπόστολοςan apostle, a messen
Χριστόςanointed, the MeοὐNeg
δέbut, on the other ha
καίand, even, also,ἀξιόωI account or treἐπιλέγωI call, choose f

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceΠαῦλος · 158× in the New Testament
Acts 1 Corinthians Colossians Philemon 1 Thessalonians 2 Corinthians 2 Thessalonians Ephesians Galatians 1 Timothy 2 Peter 2 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament15 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch Polycarp Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 19.102c. AD 75–95

προεξῄεσαν δὲ Κλαύδιος μὲν ὁ πάτρως αὐτοῦ καὶ Μᾶρκος Βινίκιος ὁ τῆς ἀδελφῆς ἀνὴρ ἔτι δὲ Οὐαλέριος Ἀσιατικός, οὓς οὐδὲ βουλομένοις διακλεῖσαι δύναμις ἦν αἰδοῖ τῆς ἀξιώσεως, εἵπετο δʼ αὐτὸς σὺν Παύλῳ Ἀρουντίῳ.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 5.5c. AD 96

διὰ ζῆλον καὶ ἔριν Παῦλος ὑπομονῆς βραβεῖον ὑπέδειξεν,

Ignatius of AntiochThe Letters of Ignatius 1.12.2c. AD 110

πάροδός ἐστε τῶν εἰς θεὸν ἀναιρουμένων, Παύλου συμμύσται τοῦ ἡγιασμένου.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD 5th c. AD 8th c. AD
ÉdP 7 (1948), p. 40-Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 311

σαργάνη α Ἀεῖς Σαλιοῦτος σαργάνη α Ἰσίδωρος Ἡρᾶ σαργάνη α Ἥρων Ἀπώνεως σαργάνη α Παῦλος Ἰσιδώρου σαργάνη α Πελῆνις σαργάναι β Ἀχιλλᾶς Ἀντωνίνου σαργάνη α Ἰσιδώρα Πτολεμαίου σαργάνη α

P.Cair. Isid. 20Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 314

Ἀτισίου Διόσκορος Κάστορος Παμοῦν Ἥρωνος Νεᾶς μητρὸς Τύχης κτηνῶν ὁμοίως Ἀτῖσις Ἀβοίκεως Δοῦλος Λεονίδου Παῦλος Ἰσιδώρου Σαβῖνος Ἀχιλλᾶ Οὐενᾶφρις Ἀιώνεως Σώτας Ἀπολλωνίου Παῆσις Σεταβοῦ Οὐενᾶφρις Παησίου Κοπρῆς Παλήμωνος Μιὼς

P.Cair. Isid. 28Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 312–AD 323

δραχμαὶ Γ Ἡρᾶς Βακχείου ἀρτάβαι γ τάλαντα γ Ἁτρῆς εἰρηνάρχης ἀρτάβαι β τάλαντα β Παῦλος Ἰσιδώρου ἀρτάβαι γ τάλαντα γ Κάλλων Οὐενάφρεως ἀρτάβαι γ τάλαντα γ Παπέεις Ἀιώνεως ἀρτάβη

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
εἰσελθὼνeiserchomai having entered G1525 Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
192× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To enter means to go into a place or situation, like Jesus entering a house in Matthew 9:25 or a city in Mark 1:21. It can be physical or symbolic, like entering a new phase of life. This word is used in many Bible stories, including when Jesus entered Jerusalem in Mark 11:11.
Amplified meaning
entered, came to
Tyndale gloss
to enter
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word εἰσέρχομαι (*eiserchomai*) means to enter, either literally or figuratively. It is composed of the prefix εἰς (into) and the root ἔρχομαι (to come). This term is used in various contexts in the New Testament, including entering a house (Matthew 8:5) or the kingdom of God (Matthew 7:13). It can also refer to entering into states of being or experiences, such as hope or temptation.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰσ-έρχομαι,

[in LXX chiefly for בּוֹא ;]

to go in or into, enter: Mt 9:25, Lk 7:45, al.; seq. εἰς, Mt 10:12, Mk 2:1, al.; seq. διά (πύλης, θύρας, etc.), Mt 7:13, Jo 10:1, al.; ὑπὸ τ. στέγην, Mt 8:8; c. adv.: ὅπου, Mk 14:14, He 6:20; ὧδε, Mt 22:12; ἔσω, Mt 26:58; seq. πρός, c acc. pers., Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰσ-έρχομαι ; fut. εἰσελεύσομαι ; 2 aor. εἰσῆλθον, 2 pers. plur. εἰσήλθατε (Lk. xi. 52, but Rec. -@ere), impy. εἰσέλθατε (Mt. vii. 13 but R ἃ -θετε, [3d pers. sing. -θάτω Mk. xiii. 15, R G -θέτω]) ; see ἀπέρχομαι, init. ; pi. εἰσελήλυθα, 3 pers. plur. εἰσελήλυθαν (Jas. v. 4, for RG εἰσεληλύθασιν, see γίνομαι, init.); Sept. mostly for 8)3; to go or come into or in; to enter; 1. prop., of men and of animals: foll. by eis with specification of the place (cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. ii. p. 12 sq-), as into a house, into a city, Mt. viii. 5; x. 12; Mk. ii. 1; xi. 11; Acts xxiii. 16, 33, and often. without specification of place, —when mention of it has already been made, as Mt. ix. 25; [Mk. vii. 25 Tdf.]; Lk. vii. 45; xiv. 23; xv. 28 ef. 25; xxiv.3; Actsi. 13; v. 7,10; x. 25; 1 Co. xiv. 23 sq. ; or it can be easily supplied from the context, as Lk. xiii. 24; xvii. 7; εἰς is also added…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰσέρχομαι. With the use of εἰσέρχομαι in Lk 177 we may compare P Eleph 138 (B.c. 223-2) οὔπω εἰσελήλυθεν ἐξ ἀγροῦ. For other examples of this common verb, cf. P Ryl 11. 151° (A.D. 40) εἰσελθὼν εἰς τὴν ὑ[πάρ]χοί(υσαν) ἐν τῇ κώμῃ οἰκ[ίαν, P Oxy ID. 237% 17 (a.p. 186) τὸν μείζονα ἀγῶνα e[i]oeXevoerat, ‘he shall enter upon the more serious lawδι (Edd.), and P Tebt 11. 4188 (iii/A.D.) καλῶς ποιήσεις, ἀδελφέ, [ἐϊὰν εἰσέρχῃ ἐνεγκὼν μετὰ σεαυτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκά μου, ἔγραψα [γ]ὰρ αὐτῇ σὺν σοὶ εἰσελθεῖν, “you will do well, brother, to come up and bring my wife with you, for I have written to her to come with you’’ (Edd.). See also P Leid W¥-4! (ii/iii A.D.) Κύριε... . εἴσελθε καὶ ἐπάκουσόν por. On the use of the mid. εἰσέλθοιτο for the active in Phrygian sepulchral inscrr. see W. M. Ramsay Exp T xxvi. p.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰσέρχομαι (eiserchomai) — to enter.

εἰσέρχομαι,

future -ειεύσομαι: aorist -ήλῠθον, -ῆλθον: in Attic dialect, future is supplied by εἴσειμι, and imperfect by εἰσῄειν:— go in or into, enter, in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἄλσος, δόμους, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰσῆλθ᾽ ἑκατόμβας invaded the hecatombs, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but in Prose mostly with Preps., ἐς οἴκημα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐς. ἐς τὰς σπονδάς come into the treaty, [Refs]; εἰς τὸν πόλεμον variant in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰ. εἰς τοὺς ἐφήβους enter the ranks of the Ephebi, [Refs]; also εἰ. πρός τινα enter his house, visit him, [Refs]; of a doctor, pay a visit, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, of money, etc., come in, προσόδους εἰσελθούσας [Refs]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰσέρχομαι

eiserchomai

from 1519 and 2064; to enter (literally or figuratively):--X arise,

come (in, into), enter in(-to), go in (through).

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 2064

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰσέρχομαι

v.

I go in, come in, enter

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἰσέρχομαι eiserchomai 194x

to go or come in, enter, Mt. 7:13; 8:5, 8; spc. to enter by force, break in, Mk. 3:27; Acts 20:29; met. with εἰς κόσμον, to begin to exist, come into existence, Rom. 5:12; 2 Jn. 7; or, to make one’s appearance on earth, Heb. 10:5; to enter into or take possession of, Lk. 22:3; Jn. 13:27; to enter into, enjoy, partake of, Mt. 19:23, 24; to enter into any one’s labor, be his successor, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰσέρχομαι fut. -ελεύσομαι aor2 -ήλυ^θον, -ῆλθον but attic fut. is supplied by εἴσειμι and imperf. by εἰσῄειν Dep.:— to go in or into, enter, c. acc., Il., etc.; in Prose, εἰς. εἰς . . , Xen., etc.; εἰς. εἰς τὰς σπονδάς to come into the treaty, Thuc.; εἰς. εἰς τοὺς ἐφήβους to enter the Ephebi, Xen.: of money, to come in, id. Xen.

of the chorus or of actors, to come upon the stage, to enter, Plat., Xen.:— to enter the lists, Soph.

as attic law-term, of the accuser, to come into court, Plat., Dem.

metaph., [μένος] ἄνδρας ἐσέρχεται courage enters into the men, Il.; Κροῖσον γέλως εἰσῆλθεalso c. dat., δέος εἰς. τινι Plat.:—also to come into one's mind, Hdt.; so, impers., εἰσῆλθε αὐτόν, c. inf., it comes into one's head that . . , id.…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAP-NSM — Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
12%having entered
having entered12% · 24×enter12% · 23×he entered8% · 16×entered8% · 16×entering6% · 11×you may enter4% · 7×do enter3% · 5×they entered2% · 4×other renderings45% · 88×

194 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 67 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb93%adverbial5%object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 192 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἑαυτοῦἀρχιερεύςhigh priest, chi
μήNeg
οὐNegἵναin order that, sΣαμαρίτηςa Samaritan
αὐτός
ἔγερσιςa waking up, resεἰςπαρακαλέωI summon, entrea
Article the
εἰμίI am, existοὐNegοὐδέNeg
θεόςGod, a god
Article the
εἰσέρχομαιhaving entered192×
what comes after →
εἰς
Article theαὐτόςπειρασμόςtrial, testing,
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oἐπιτρέπωI allow, permit
δέbut, on the other ha
εἰςArticle theαὐτός
διά
Article theαὐτόςἀπιστίαunbelief, unfait
αὐτός
εἰςκαίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰσέρχομαι · 192× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Acts Mark Hebrews John Revelation James 1 Corinthians Romans

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 333 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.34c. AD 40

διὸ καὶ Μωυσῆς φησιν ὅτι „οὐκ ἐάσει τὸν ὀλοθρεύοντα εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὰς οἰκίας ὑμῶν πατάξαι“ (Exod.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.319c. AD 75–95

καὶ οἱ μὲν μηδὲ θύσαντες, οἱ δὲ ἡμιέργους τὰς θυσίας καταλιπόντες, πολλοὶ δʼ οὐδʼ ἀρχὴν εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν δυνηθέντες ἀπίασιν ὑπακούειν τοῖς Μωυσέος προστάγμασι μᾶλλον ἢ ποιεῖν τὰ κατὰ βούλησιν τὴν ἑαυτῶν προτιμῶντες, καὶ τὸν ἐλέγξοντα περὶ…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 6.8c. AD 100

Ἰδού, τάδε λέγει κύριος ὁ θεός: Εἰσέλθατε εἰς τὴν γῆν τὴν ἀγαθήν, ἣν ὤμοσεν κύριος τῷ Ἀβραὰμ καὶ Ἰσαὰκ καὶ Ἰακώβ, καὶ κατακληρονομήσατε αὐτήν, γῆν ῥέουσαν γάλα καὶ μέλι.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Ryl. 2 151Euhemeria (Arsinoites)AD 40

τῆς Θεμίστου μερίδος. Ἡραῒς γυνὴ Ἡρακλᾶτος τοῦ Π … … τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς κώμης εἰσελθοῦσα εἰς τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν ἐν τῇ κώμῃ οἰκίαν καὶ συλλαβοῦσα τὴν θυγατέρα μου ἔδωκεν πληγὰς

P.Fouad 1 75ArsinoitesAD 64

r Θαυβᾶς Πομπηίωι τῶι πατρὶ χαίρειν. καλῶς ποιήσεις λαβὼν τὴν ἐπιστολήν μου ἐξαυτῆς εἰσελθὼν διὰ τὸ τὴν ταλαίπωρον θυγατέρα σου Ἑρεννίαν τετελευτηκέναι καὶ ἤδη εὐτυχῆσθαιτῷ Φαῶφι τῆι ἐνάτηι

P.Vind.Bosw. 1Nilopolis (Arsinoites)AD 87

μερίδος στρατηγοῦ … … ος τὸ ὑπογεγραμμένον ε … ως ἐξ ἡμῶν ἄνδρες ι εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὸν κράτιστον πρὸς τῷ ἰδίῳ λόγῳ ἠξίουν ἐξετασθῆναι πότερον πραταὶ αἱ τάξεις εἰσὶν

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
προσευξάμενος,proseuchomai having prayed, G4336 Verb · aorist · middle deponent · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
86× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To pray to God, as Jesus did in Matthew 6:5-7 and Luke 1:10, or to worship Him
Amplified meaning
worshiping, petitioning God
Tyndale gloss
to pray
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

προσεύχομαι is a Greek verb meaning to pray, specifically directed towards God or gods. It is built from the roots meaning 'towards' and 'to vow.' The New Testament frequently uses this term in various contexts, including supplication and worship, as seen in verses like Matthew 6:5-7 and James 5:13. The entries do not present any significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

προσ-εύχομαι,

[in LXX chiefly for פלל hith.;]

to pray (always of prayer to God, or in cl., to gods): absol., Mt 6:5-7, 9 14:23 19:13 26:36, 39, 41, 44, Mk 1:35 6:46 11:24, 25 13:33 (WH, R, txt., om.) Mk 14:32, 38, 39, Lk 1:10 3:21 5:16 6:12 9:18, 28, 29 11:1, 2 18:1, 10 22:44 (WH, R, mg., om.), Ac 1:24 6:6 9:11, 40 10:9, 30 11:5 12:12 13:3 14:23 16:25 20:36 21:5 22:17 28:8, I Co 11:4, 5 14:14, I Th 5:17, I Ti 2:8, Ja 5:13, 18; seq. λέγων, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

προσ-εύχομαι; depon. mid.; impf. προσηυχόμην ; fut. προσεύξομαι; 1 aor. mpoonv&duny; [on the augm. see WH. App. p. 162; ef. Τὰ Proleg. p. 121]; fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. down ; Sept. for Sbann; to offer prayers, to pray, (everywhere of prayers to the gods, or to God [cf. δέησις, fin.]): absol., Mt. vi. 5-7, 9; xiv. 23; xxvi. 36,39, 44; Mk. i. 35; vi.46; xi. 24 sq.; xiii. 33 [ΠΤ WH om. Tr br. the el.]; xiv. [32], 39; Lk. i. 10; iii. 21; v.16; vi. 12; ix. 18, 28 sq-; xi. 1.54. : xviii. 1, 10; xxii. 44 [Τὸ br. WH reject the pass.]; Acts i. 24; vi. 6; ix 11. 40. χ 9.530. Kio ois xii. 12; xiii. 3; xiv. 23; xvi. 25; xx. 86; χχὶ. 5; xxii. 17; xxviii. 8; 1 Co. xi. 4 sq.3 xiv.14; 1 Th.v.17; 1 Tim. ii. 8; Jas. v. 13,18; foll. by λέγων and direct disc. containing the words of the prayer, Mt. xxvi. 39, 42; Lk. xxii.41; προσεύχ- with a dat. indicating the manner or instrument, 1 Co. xi.5 [W. $31, 7d.]…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

προσεύχομαι. An interesting ex. of this verb, which is always used of prayer to the gods or to God, is afforded by P Cairo Zen 59034 (B.C. 257). A certain Zoilos had been ordered by the god Sarapis to inform a high State official Apollonios that a temple should be erected to him. Zoilos neglected the charge and in consequence was thrown into a serious illness κινδυνεῦσαί [pe. But on praying to the god and promising to do his bidding he was healed—* προσευξάμενος δὲ] αὐ[τῶι, ἐ]άμ pe] ὑγιάσηι, διότι ὑπομενῶ τὴν ληιτοϊῃυρ)γίαν καὶ ποιή[σει]ν τὸ ὑφ᾽ αὑτοῦ προστασσόμενον (supply ὑγιάσθην). [An important commentary on the whole letter is supplied by Deissmann Zxf. VIII. xxiv. p. 420ff.J. Cf. Pretsigke 3740 (i/a.b.) ΓἌττηος προσεύχετα[ι] τοῖς ᾿Αβύτο “νὰ θεοῖς, ἵνα ὑγιαίνῃ. See also 5.2.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

προσεύχομαι (proseuchomai) — to pray.

προσεύχομαι,

future -ξομαι[Refs 4th c.BC+]:—offer prayers or vows, θεοῖς [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. with accusative, π. τὸν θεόν address him in prayer, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. absolutely, offer prayers, worship, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. γλώσσῃ, πνεύματι, νοΐ, [NT]

II. with accusative of things, pray for a thing, νίκην πολέμου [Refs 5th c.BC+]: c.infinitive, ἕλκειν τὸ βέδυ π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ζῆσαι προσεύχου pray for life, [Refs] with infinitive, [NT]; π. ἵνα.., περί τινων ὅπως, [NT]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

προσεύχομαι

proseuchomai

from 4314 and 2172; to pray to God, i.e. supplicate, worship:--pray (X

earnestly, for), make prayer.

see GREEK for 4314

see GREEK for 2172

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

προσεύχομαι

v.

I pray, pray for

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

προσεύχομαι proseuchomai 85x

to pray, offer prayer, Mt. 5:44; 6:5, 6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

προσεύχομαι fut. ξομαι Dep.:

to offer prayers or vows, Aesch., Eur., etc.

c. acc., πρ. τὸν θεόν to address him in prayer, Ar.

absol. to offer prayers, to worship, Hdt., Aesch., etc.

πρ. τι to pray for a thing, Xen.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-ADP-NSM — Verb · aorist · middle deponent · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-ADP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: middle Deponent Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
28%praying
praying28% · 24×do pray17% · 15×pray13% · 11×having prayed8% · 7×he prayed8% · 7×he was praying5% · 4×you may pray3% · 3×he should pray2% · 2×other renderings16% · 14×

87 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 20 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb86%adverbial14%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 86 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
γρηγορέωI am awake, am vσύαὐτός
σύ
θύραa door, opportunκαταράομαιI curseπερί
αὐτός
πρόσωπονthe face, counteεἰμίI am, existλέγωI say, speak
ὅτανwhen, whensoever
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheαὐτός
ἀπέρχομαιI come or go away fr
πάλινagain, further, δεύτερος& Adv
προσεύχομαιhaving prayed,86×
what comes after →
Article the
δέbut, on the otheπατήρfather, Father, αὐτός
καίand, even, also, nam
αἰτέωI ask, request, λέγωI say, speakεἰμίI am, exist
ἵναin order that, so th
μήNegεἰCondδιερμηνεύωI translate, int
περί
ἐγώArticle theαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
ἵναin order that, sμήNegκαίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπροσεύχομαι · 86× in the New Testament
Luke Acts Matthew Mark 1 Corinthians James Colossians 1 Thessalonians 2 Thessalonians 1 Timothy Ephesians Hebrews
Across the New Testament15 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 44 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Ignatius of Antioch The Shepherd of Hermas The Didache Philo of Alexandria Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaOn Dreams 2.139c. AD 40

Ἆρ’ οὖν, φησίν, ἐλεύσομαι μὲν ὁ ὀρθὸς λόγος, ἐγώ, ἀφίξεται δὲ καὶ ἡ τοῦ φιλομαθοῦς θιάσου [ψυχὴ] μήτηρ ὁμοῦ καὶ τροφός, ἀρετῶσα παιδεία, συντενοῦσι δὲ καὶ οἱ ἀμφοτέρων ἡμῶν ἔγγονοι καὶ στάντες ἀντικρὺς οὕτω κατὰ στοῖχον ἐν κόσμῳ τὰς χεῖρας ἐξάραντες…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 10.252c. AD 75–95

ὁρῶντες οὖν τὸν Δανίηλον τρὶς τῆς ἡμέρας προσευχόμενον τῷ θεῷ πρόφασιν ἔγνωσαν εὑρηκέναι, διʼ ἧς ἀπολέσουσιν αὐτόν.

Clement of RomeSecond Clement 16.4c. AD 96

καλὸν οὖν ἐλεημοσύνη ὡς μετάνοια ἁμαρτίας: κρείσσων νηστεία προσευχῆς, ἐλεημοσύνη δὲ ἀμφοτέρων: ἀγάπη δὲ καλύπτει πλῆθος ἁμαρτιῶν, προσευχὴ δὲ ἐκ καλῆς συνειδήσεως ἐκ θανάτου ῥύεται.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 3rd c. BC undated
P.Lond. 7 2046Philadelphia (Arsinoites)276 BC–227 BC

μόνος, ἀλλὰ καὶ οἰκείους ἔχω ἵνα καὶ περὶ τοῦ βασιλέως καὶ τῆς σῆς ὑγιείας προσεύχωμαι. γέγραφα οὖν σοι ἵνα μὴ ἀλλότριος ἐμπέσηι, ἀλλʼ ἐγώ σοι ὑπάρχω. εὐτύχει.

P.Lond. 6 1926AD 326–AD 375

ἴασιν λαμβάνω. δέομαι τῷ θεῷ δέομαι καὶ σοι μνήσθητί μου ἐν τῇ ἁγίᾳ σου προσευχῇ. εἰ καὶ ἐν σώματι οὐκ ἧκα παρὰ τοὺς πόδας σου ἐν πνεύματι ἧκα πρὸς

P.Neph. 12Omboi ?AD 301–AD 400

Σεραπίωνα ἀ … … Ταϩμουρού· ἀσπάζομαι Καπίτωνα· ἀσπάζομαι ὑμᾶς πάντας τοὺς ἀδελφούς μου, ὅπως προσεύχησθε περὶ ἐμοῦ. γράφω σοι, Νεφερῶς, προνοήσῃς τὸ μικρὸν … … ον γῆς, ὡς ἔρχομαι,

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
ἐπιθεὶςepitithēmi having laid G2007 Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
40× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means to put or lay something on someone, like in Matthew 27:29 where a crown of thorns was placed on Jesus.
Tyndale gloss
to put/lay on
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐπιτίθημι (i.e., *epitithēmi*) means to lay, set, or place upon something. It can also imply adding to, imposing, or inflicting, and is used in various contexts, such as laying hands on someone or imposing a penalty. In the New Testament, it appears in verses like Matthew 9:18 and Revelation 22:18. The word is built from the prefix ἐπι- and the root τίθημι.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπι-τίθημι

[in LXX for נָתַן, שָׁוָה, etc. ;]

to lay, set or place upon: c. acc rei, seq. ἐπί, c. acc rei, Mt 23:4, Lk 15:5, Jo 9:6 (WH, txt.), 15, Ac 15:10 28:3; ἐπί, c. gen. rei, Mt 27:29; ἐν, ib.; c. dat. pers., σταυρόν, Lk 23:26; στέφανον, Jo 19:2; ὄνομα, Mk 3:16, 17; πληγάς, Lk 10:30, Ac 16:23; ἐπί c. acc pers., Re 22:18; of the laying on of hands, τ. χεῖρα (-ας), seq. ἐπί c. acc…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπι-τίθημι, 3 pers. plur. ἐπιτιθέασι (Mt. xxiii. 4; οἵ. W. § 14, 1b.; Β. 44 (38); Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 505; Kiihner i. p. 643; [Jelf § 274; and on this and foll. forms see Veitch 5. vv. τίθημι, τιθέω]), impy. ἐπιτίθει (1 Tim. ν. 22; see Matthiae § 210, 2 and 6; Bittm. Ausf. Spr. i. Ρ. 508; Kiihner § 209, 5; [Jelf § 274 obs. 4]); impf. 3 pers. plur. ἐπετίθουν (Acts viii. 17 RG), ἐπετίθεσαν (ib. LT Tr WH; ef. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 509; Β. 45 (39)); fut. ἐπιθήσω ; 1 aor. ἐπέθηκα; 2 aor. ἐπέθην, impv. ἐπίθες (Mt. ix. 18; Gen. xlviii. 18; Judg. xviii. 19); Mid., [pres. ἐπιτίθεμαι] ; fut. ἐπιθήσομαι; 2 aor. ἐπεθέμην ; [1 aor. pass. ἐπετέθην (Mk. iv. 21 RG)]; in Sept. chiefly for }D3, Dw and DWI; 1. Active: a. to put or lay upon: τὶ ἐπί τι, Mt. xxiii. 4; xxvii. 29R GL; Mk. iv. 21 RG; Lk. xv. 5; Jn. ix. [6 WH txt. Tr mrg.], 15; [xix. 2 Lumrg., see below]; Acts xv. 10 [οἵ. W. 318 (298); B.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐπιτίθημι is construed with the acc. and dat., as in Ac 2819, in BGU IV. 12081 4 (B.c. 27) ὃ ἐπιτέθ[εισα7. τοῖς παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ [πιττάκ]ιον, 2b. 11397 (B.C. 5) Πάρθος. . . αὐτῇ ἐπέθηκεν TIptua (cf. Mk 38), P Ryl 11. 819 (c. a.p. 104) τὴν yap ὅλου τοῦ πράγματος ἐξουσίαν τοῖς κατασπ]ορεῦσι ἐπεθέμην, “for I gave the inspectors of sowing the conduct of the whole matter”? (Edd.), and with the acc. alone in 24. 121} (ii/A.D.) tT[as] σφραγεῖδας ds ἐπέθηκ[ε, ‘the seals which he affixed” (Edd.). In BGU IV. τοιοῦ (mid. ii/A.pD.) we have ὃς ἔδωκεν τὸν στρατηγὸν τοῦ νομοῦ els T[d] πέρας ἐπιθεῖναι τῇ] λογοθεσίᾳ. For the meaning “‘ persuade,” ‘‘ enjoin,” cf. P Oxy X. 12558 (A.D. 292) ἐπειθεμένου σου ἡμῖν, 26. 12651 (A.D. 336) ἐπέθετό μοι ἡ σὴ ἐμμέλε[ια ἐγγρά]φως δηλῶσαι, “your grace enjoined me to state in writing” (Edd.), and for the meaning ‘‘attack,” ‘‘assault,’’ as in Ac 181°, cf. P Tebt I. 1514 (B.c.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπιτίθημι (epitithēmi) — to put/lay on.

ἐπιτίθημι,

passive mostly furnished by ἐπίκειμαι: active, lay, put or place upon, of offerings laid on the altar, ἐπὶ μηρία θέντες Ἀπόλλωνι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; set meats on the table, εἴδατα πόλλ᾽ ἐπιθεῖσα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πάντ᾽ ἐπιθεῖτε on the car, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τινὶ κύρτον καὶ κώπαν, as a grave-monument, [Refs 7th c.BC+]: but also c.genitive, ἐ. λεχέων τινά [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κεφαλὴν ἐπὶ στέρνα τινός [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with accusative only, put upon, set up, ἐ. φάρμακα apply salves, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐ. μνημεῖά τινι to him, [Refs]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπιτίθημι

epitithemi

from 1909 and 5087; to impose (in a friendly or hostile sense):--add

unto, lade, lay upon, put (up) on, set on (up),

+ surname, X wound.

see GREEK for 1909

see GREEK for 5087

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπιτίθημι

v.

I put, place upon, lay on

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπιτίθημι epitithēmi 39x

to put, place, or lay upon, Mt. 9:18; Lk. 4:40; to impose a name, Mk. 3:16, 17; to inflict, Acts 16:23; Lk. 10:30; Rev. 22:18; mid. to impose with authority, Acts 15:28; 28:10; to set or fall upon, assail, assault, attack, Acts 18:10

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐπιτίθημι fut. -θήσω perf. -τέθεικα the Pass.is mostly furnished by ἐπίκειμαι Act. to lay, put or place upon, of offerings laid on the altar, meats on the table, etc., c. dat., Od., attic; also c. gen., Il., Hdt.:—c. acc. only, ἐπ. φάρμακα to apply salves, Il.; ἐπ. στήλην to set it up, Hdt.

to put on a covering or lid, Od.; λίθον ἐπέθηκε θύρῃσιν, i. e. put a stone as a door to the cave, put it before the door, id. Od.: to put a door to, shut it, Il., Hom.

to put to, grant or give besides, Il.

of Time, to add, bring on, Od.

μύθῳ or μύθοις τέλος ἐπιθεῖναι to put an end to them, Il.

to put on as a finish, ἐπέθηκε κορώνην id. Il.; ἐπ. κεφαλαῖον (v. sub κεφαλαῖον) Dem.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAP-NSM — Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
23%having laid
having laid23% · 9×put8% · 3×lay5% · 2×do lay5% · 2×he may lay5% · 2×he added5% · 2×they laid3% · 1×they were laying3% · 1×other renderings44% · 17×

39 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 25 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 40 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
πῶλοςa colt, young asβαρύςheavy, weighty, δώδεκαIndec
χείρa hand
Article theἄρρωστοςinfirm, sick, il
ἔρχομαιI come, go
ἀλλάbut, exceptἵναin order that, s
ἄκανθαa thorn-bush
ἐκ
αὐτός
ὄμμαan eyeἐπί
ἐπιτίθημιhaving laid40×
what comes after →
Article the
χείρa handπρόςθεόςGod, a god
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ὄνομαname, character,
ἐπί
Article theαὐτός
σύ
βάροςa weight, burdenArticle the
ἐπάνωon the top, above, s
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐπιτίθημι · 40× in the New Testament
Acts Mark Matthew Luke John Revelation 1 Timothy
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 180 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.91c. AD 40

ζητητέον δέ, διὰ τί πᾶσιν ἐπιτιθεὶς τοῖς ἄλλοις τὰ ὀνόματα οὐκ ἐπιτέθεικεν ἑαυτῷ.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.30c. AD 75–95

μετὰ δὴ τοῦτο τῇ δευτέρᾳ τῶν ἡμερῶν τὸν οὐρανὸν τοῖς ὅλοις ἐπιτίθησιν, ὅτʼ αὐτὸν ἀπὸ τῶν ἄλλων διακρίνας κατʼ αὐτὸν ἠξίωσε τετάχθαι, κρύσταλλόν τε περιπήξας αὐτῷ καὶ νότιον αὐτὸν καὶ ὑετώδη πρὸς τὴν ἀπὸ τῶν δρόσων ὠφέλειαν ἁρμοδίως τῇ γῇ…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 7.8c. AD 100

καὶ ὅταν γένηται οὕτως, ἄγει ὁ βαστάζων τὸν τράγον εἰς τὴν ἔρημον καὶ ἀφαιρεῖ τὸ ἔριον καὶ ἐπιτίθησιν αὐτὸ ἐπὶ φρύγανον τὸ λεγόμενον ῥαχήλ, οὗ καὶ τοὺς βλαστοὺς εἰώθαμεν τρώγειν ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ εὑρίσκοντες: οὕτω μόνης τῆς ῥαχοῦς οἱ καρποὶ γλυκεῖς εἰσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
1st c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD
O.Petr. Mus. 190Berenike bzw. Koptos19 BC–AD 69

vestiges … ιου Α … ς χαίρειν ἀπέχω παρὰ σοῦ ἐπὶ Βερνίκης … σοι ἐπέθηκεν Πεταρ … … Ἁρσιήσεως εἰς … λόγον πυροῦ ἀρτάβας … vestiges

P.Athen.. 32Karanis? (Arsinoites)AD 39

σκεύη καὶ ἐπήνεγκάν μοι πληγὰς πλείστας εἰς τὸ τυχὸν μέρος τοῦ σώματος … ἐπιθέντες τη … ὥρας δ τῆς … … ἐπελθόντες ἐπὶ τὴν οἰκίαν

P. Merton 3 118OxyrhynchosAD 82

αὐτῶν ὃ ἀνῄρηνται κοινῶς ἐξ ἴσου … ἀπὸ κοπρίας εἰς δουλείαν θηλυκὸν σωμάτιον ᾧ ἐπέθηκεν ὄνομα Θεανοῦς ὥστε τὴν ὁμολογοῦσαν τοῦτο θρέψαι καὶ θηλάσαι τῷ ἰδίῳ ἑαυτῆς γάλακτι ἔτι

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
τὰςho the G3588 Article · accusative · plural · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-APF — Article · accusative · plural · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-APF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
χεῖραςcheir hands G5495 Noun · accusative · plural · feminine
176× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The word for hand in Greek can be literal or figurative, referring to power or instrument, as seen in Matthew 3:12 and 1 Corinthians 16:21. It is often used to describe a means of action or a symbol of authority, and is sometimes used in phrases that are similar to Hebrew constructions.
Amplified meaning
laying on, imparting
Tyndale gloss
hand
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

χείρ (cheir) is a feminine noun meaning 'hand,' used in various contexts both literally and figuratively, such as power or agency. It appears frequently in the New Testament, notably in verses like Matthew 3:12 and Acts 11:21. The word is built from a root suggesting the idea of grasping, and it encompasses a range of uses, including physical actions and metaphorical expressions of authority.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

χείρ, gen., χειρος (acc., χεῖραν, I Pe 5:6 T), ἡ,

[in LXX chiefly for יָד ;]

the hand: Mt 3:12, Mk 3:1, Lk 6:6, al. mult.; ἡ χ., acting subject, Lk 22:21; pl., Ac 17:25 20:34, I Jo 1:1; τ. ἔργα τῶν χ., Ac 7:41, Re 9:20; ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τ. ἐμῇ χ., I Co 16:21, Col 4:18, II Th 3:17

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

χείρ, gen. χειρός, acc. χεῖραν (1 Pet. v.6 Tdf.; see ἄρσην, fin.), 7, [fr. τ. meaning ‘to lay hold of’; ef. Lat. heres, οἴου; Curtius § 189; Vanicek p. 249 sq.], fr. Hom. down, Hebr. 1, the hand: Mt. iii. 12; Mk. iii. 1; Lk. vi. 6; 1 Tim. ii. 8; Heb. xii. 12, and often; the gen. with the verbs ἅπτομαι. ἐπιλαμβάνομαι, κρατέω, πιάζω, etc., which see in their places; the dat. with ἐργάζομαι, ἐσθίω, ete. ; 6 ἀσπασμὸς TH ἐμῇ χειρί, 1 Co. xvi. 21; Col.iv.18; 2 Th. iii. 17; the acc. with the verbs αἴρω, δέω. ἐκπετάννυμι, ἐκτείνω, ἐμβάπτω. ἐπιτίθημι, καθαρίζω, κατασείω. vinta, ete. ἡ ἐπίθεσις τῶν χειρῶν [see ἐπίθεσις and reff.], 1 Tim. iv. 14; 2 Tim. i.6; Heb.vi.2; ἐν χειρί τινος, in imitation of the Hebr. “3. 1a [ef. Β. 8188, 20 cf. 319 sq. (274) ; Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. iii. 19], by the help or agency, of any one, by means of any one, Acts vii. 35 Rec.; Gal. iii. 19; σὺν χειρὶ ἀγγέλου, with the…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

χείρ χείρ, “ἐᾷ hand.”” The grammatical forms of this common noun are fully illustrated by Mayser Gr. p. 282f. For its varied uses we may cite—P Par 637° (B.c. 164) (=P Petr III. p- 36) φροντίζεσθ᾽ ὅπως μηθεὶς ἐπ[ι]βάλληι τὰ[ς] χεῖρας τοῖς τοιούτοις κατὰ μηδεμίαν π[αρ]εύρεϊσιν, ‘take care that no one lay violent hands on such persons on any pretext whatever ’’ (Mahaffy): Perxg 268 C™ (B.c. 98) τὸν παρακα]λέσοντα δοῦναι τ[ὰ]ς χεῖρας ἡμῖν εἰ[ς σύλλυσιν, ‘to give the hands towards an agreement to be brought about by us,”’ a usage for which Deissmann (8S p. 251) can find no other ex., but compares Gal 2° δεξιὰς ἔδωκαν... κοινωνίας, and similar phrases in 1 and 2 Macc. : P Tebt II. 39178 (a.D. go) ἡ χὶρ ἥδη κυρία ἔστω ws ἐν δημοσίωι κατακεχωρισμένη, “this bond shall be valid, as if it had been publicly registered” (Edd.), similarly 76. 37918 (A.D. 128): BGU II. 42316 (ii/A.D.) (= Selections…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

χείρ (cheir) — hand.

χείρ, ἡ, χειρός, χειρί, χεῖρα,

dual χεῖρε, χεροῖν, plural χεῖρες, χερῶν, χεῖρας, penultimate being regularly short, when the ultima is long; dative plural regularly χερσί (χειρσί occurs in codex Vat. of [LXX], and late Inscrr. as [Refs 8th c.BC+], and once in trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; χέρεσσι (ν) [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—Doric dialect nominative χέρς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; χήρ [Refs 5th c.BC+] (also, ={δίψακος}, Ps.-[Refs 7th c.BC+]:— the hand, whether closed, παχεῖα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; or open, flat, χερσὶ καταπρηνέσσι, χειρὶ καταπρηνεῖ,[Refs 8th c.BC+]: frequently in plural where a single hand is meant, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, singular where more than one hand is spoken of, e.g. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; dual joined with plural, ἄμφω χεῖρας [Refs 8th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

χείρ

cheir

perhaps from the base of 5494 in the sense of its congener the base of

5490 (through the idea of hollowness for grasping); the hand

(literally or figuratively (power); especially (by Hebraism) a means

or instrument):--hand.

see GREEK for 5494

see GREEK for 5490

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

χείρ, χειρός, ἡ

n.f.

a hand

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

χείρ cheir 177x

a hand, Mt. 3:12; 4:6; 8:15 freq.; from the Hebrew, χεὶρ Κυρίου, a special operation of God, Acts 11:21; 13:3; ἐν χειρί, by agency, Acts 7:35; Gal. 3:19

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

χείρ the penult. is regularly short, when the ult. is long: e.g. χειρός, χερών, but Poets used the penult. long or short, as the verse required. the hand, Hom., etc.: also the hand and arm, the arm, χεῖρα μέσην ἀγκῶνος ἔνερθεν Il.; χεῖρες ἀπ᾽ ὤμων ἀΐσσοντο Hes.; so, ἐν χερσὶ πεσεῖν into the arms, Il., etc.; ἄκρη χείρ, to denote the hand as distinct from the arm, id. Il.

Special usages:

to denote position, ἐπ᾽ ἀριστερὰ χειρός Od.; ἐπὶ δεξιὰ χειρός Pind.; λαιᾶς χειρός on the left hand, Aesch.; ποτέρας τῆς χειρός; on which hand? Eur.

the dat. is common with Verbs which imply the use of hands, χειρὶ λαβεῖν, χερσὶν ἑλέσθαι, etc., Hom., etc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-APF — Noun · accusative · plural · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
50%hand
hand50% · 90×hands50% · 90×

180 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object48%adverbial41%subject8%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 176 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςἐκτείνωI stretch out, cἐν
εἰς
παραδίδωμιI hand over, delπατήρfather, Father, ἐμπίπτωI fall in, am ca
ἐκ
καίand, even, also,ἀφόβωςfearlesslyἐγώ
διά
ἔκδοτοςgiven up, deliveθεόςGod, a godπρεσβύτεροςelder
ἐμός
Article the
χείρhands176×
what comes after →
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,Article theἵναin order that, s
Article the
ἄγγελοςan angel, messenἀπόστολοςan apostle, a meπαιδίονa little child,
σύ
καίand, even, also,ἐπίDisj
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theἐκτείνωI stretch out, cἀφίημιI send away, rel
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,ποιέωI do, makeπρός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceχείρ · 176× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Mark Matthew Revelation John Hebrews 1 Corinthians 1 Timothy Galatians 1 John 1 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament21 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 860 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 118c. AD 40

κεφαλή, στέρνα, γαστήρ, διτταὶ χεῖρες, διτταὶ βάσεις·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.113c. AD 75–95

Ἐξῆρέ τε αὐτοὺς πρός τε ὕβριν τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ καταφρόνησιν Ναβρώδης, ὃς υἱωνὸς μὲν ἦν Χάμου τοῦ Νώχου, τολμηρὸς δὲ καὶ κατὰ χεῖρα γενναῖος·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.5c. AD 100

πλήρης εἰμὶ ὁλοκαυτωμάτων, καὶ στέαρ ἀρνῶν καὶ αἷμα ταύρων καὶ τράγων οὐ βούλομαι, οὐδ̓ ἂν ἔρχησθε ὀφθῆναί μοι, τίς γὰρ ἐξεζήτησεν ταῦτα ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν ὑμῶν;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Cair. Zen. 3 59443Philadelphia (Arsinoites)276 BC–227 BC

ἐπὶ τοῦ ποταμοῦ … ἵνα μὴ διασπάσηται κροκοδίλος … α, παραλαβών με Ψοσναῦς τὰς χεῖρας με προσήνεκεν καὶ τὴν γυναῖκά μου ἐπαροίνησεν ἐναντίον μαρτύρων Πετεμοῦνις καὶ Θοτεὺς τῶν παρὰ

λε Τῦβι δ. προσάγγελμα Ζήνωνι. νυκτὸς ἐκ τοῦ σιτοβολῶνος ἀπόλωλεν σήσαμον καὶ λελέανται τῆι χειρί. διὸ οὐ δυνάμεθά πως ἐπιμετρήσαντες ἰδεῖν τὸ ἀπολωλὸς ἕως ἂν ὑμεῖς ἴδητε καὶ ἐναντίον

εἰς τὸ κατάλυμα … οἱ ὑοφορβοὶ προσπηδήσαντός με τῆι ιθ ὀψὲ τῆς ὥρας τὰς χεῖρας με προσήνεγκαν … … … … … … ἐπὶ τοὺς φυλακίτας … … υρον

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
αὐτῷ,autos on him, G846 Personal pronoun · dative · singular · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-DSM — Personal pronoun · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-DSM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςon him,5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
ἰάσατοiaomai healed G2390 Verb · aorist · middle deponent · indicative · third person · singular
26× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To heal means to cure someone, either physically or spiritually, as seen in Luke 5:17 and Matthew 13:15. Jesus healed many people, including the blind and lame.
Amplified meaning
restored to health, cured
Tyndale gloss
to heal
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ἰάομαι is a Greek verb meaning 'to heal' or 'to cure,' used both literally and figuratively. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, including physical healing and spiritual restoration. The word is related to the Hebrew term for healing found in the Septuagint. There is a distinction noted between ἰάομαι and θεραπεύω, with the former focusing more on healing rather than medical treatment.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἰάομαι, -ῶμαι,

[in LXX for רפא (Ge 20:17, al.), exc. Is 30:26 61:1 (חבשׁ);]

to heal: c. acc. pers., Lk 5:17 6:19 9:2, 11, 42 14:4 22:51, Jo 4:47, Ac 9:34 10:38 28:8; pass., Mt 8:8, 13 15:28, Lk 7:7 8:47 17:15, Jo 5:13; id. seq. ἀπό, Mk 5:29, Lk 6:17; fig., of spiritual healing, Mt 13:15, Jo 12:40, Ac 28:27(LXX); pass., Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἰάομαι. As distinguished from θεραπεύω ““ treat medically’ (see s.v. and cf. Ac 2885) ἰάομαι denotes ‘‘heal,” as in Sy// 802" (referred to s.v. ἴαμα) ἀνὴρ δάκτυλον ἰάθη ὑπὸ ὄφιος, and the similar 8037 τοῦτο]ν τυφλὸν ἐόντα ἰάσατο : cf. also the magic text BGU IV. 1026**4- 16 αἱμάροϊαν ἰᾶται. On the Lukan usage of the verb see Hobart, p. 8ff., and on the ‘‘aoristic present” in Ac 9533 see Proleg. p. 119. Thayer's hint of a connexion with ἰός is not supported by modern philologists, see Boisacq, p. 362. Part IV. 2 a

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἰάομαι (iaomai) — to heal.

ἰάομαι,

imperative ἰῶ (see. below), Ionic dialect infinitive ἰᾶσθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]jᾶσθαι [Refs].: future ἰάσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἰήσομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist ἰασάμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ἰησάμην [Refs 8th c.BC+] —passive (see. below). [ῑ- in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also ῐ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—heal, cure, in present and imperfect, attempt to cure, treat, of persons or bodies, etc., τινα [Refs 8th c.BC+]

2. cure. treat, of diseases, νόσους [Refs 5th c.BC+]: metaphorically, remedy, δύσγνοιαν, ἀδικίαν ἰᾶσθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+], i.e. do not make bad worse, [Refs 7th c.BC+]

3. cure the effects of, counteract, ἄκρατος ἰ. τὸ κώνειον [Refs 1st c.AD+]

4. repair, τὸ βλαβέν [LXX+5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἰάομαι

iaomai

middle voice of apparently a primary verb; to cure (literally or

figuratively):--heal, make whole.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἰάομαι

v.

I heal

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἰάομαι iaomai 26x

to heal, cure, Mt. 8:8; Lk. 9:2; met. to heal, spiritually, restore from a state of sin and condemnation, Mt. 13:15; Heb. 12:13

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἰάομαι Pass., v. infr. [ι_α_ Hom., etc.,; later also ι] to heal, cure, Hom., etc.:— metaph., ἀδικίαν ἰᾶσθαι Eur.: proverb., μὴ τῶι κακῶι τὸ κακὸν ἰῶ, i. e. do not make bad worse, Hdt.

the aor1 ἰάθην [α_] is always pass., to be healed, to recover, Andoc., NTest.; so perf. ἴα_μαι NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-ADI-3S — Verb · aorist · middle deponent · indicative · third person · singular
aorist middle deponent indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-ADI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: middle Deponent Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
15%healed
healed15% · 4×i will heal11% · 3×heal11% · 3×having been healed7% · 2×healing7% · 2×he healed7% · 2×heals4% · 1×may be healed4% · 1×other renderings33% · 9×

27 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 17 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 26 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
λόγοςa word, speech, ἐπιστρέφωI turn back toσύ
ὅτιthat, since, because
σῶμαbody, fleshὁράωI see, look upon
Article the
εἰς
ὡςas, like as, how, wh
καίand, even, also,
θεραπείαcare, attention, hea
ἔχωI have, hold, po
ἰάομαιhealed26×
what comes after →
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,Article the
Article the
παῖςa boy or girl chθυγάτηρa daughter
ἀπό
Article the
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
Article the
παραχρῆμαinstantly, immediate

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἰάομαι · 26× in the New Testament
Luke Acts Matthew John 1 Peter Hebrews James Mark
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 40 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.118c. AD 40

καὶ πρότερον περὶ τοῦ θυμοῦ, θεραπεύων αὐτὸν καὶ ἰώμενος, διαλέγεται οὕτως·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 8.6c. AD 100

ὅτι ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ ἡμέραι ἔσονται πονηραὶ καὶ ῥυπαραί, ἐν αἷς ἡμεῖς σωθησόμεθα: ὅτι καὶ ὁ ἀλγῶν σάρκα διὰ τοῦ ῥύπου τοῦ ὑσσύπου ἰᾶται.

Clement of RomeSecond Clement 9.7c. AD 96

ὡς ἔχομεν καιρὸν τοῦ ἰαθῆναι, ἐπιδῶμεν ἑαυτοὺς τῷ θεραπεύοντι θεῷ, ἀντιμισθίαν αὐτῷ διδόντες.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
1st c. BC
P.Wash.Univ. 2 106Oxyrhynchos19 BC

χαίρειν καὶ διὰ παντὸς ὑγιαίνειν. εὐχαριστῶ σοι λίαν ὅτι ἤκουσας τὴν οἰκίαν μου οἰκοδόμους ἰαθῆναι. οὐκ ἀπέστειλές μοι φάσιν ἢ μναιαῖον ἢ κόλλημα ἀγράφου. ἵνα μοι γράψας ἐπιστολὴν ἀποστείλῃς.

It came to pass then the father <the> of Publius with fevers and with dysentery oppressed [was] lying; to whom <the> Paul having entered and having prayed, having laid the hands on him, healed him.
αὐτόν.¶autos him. G846 Personal pronoun · accusative · singular · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-ASM — Personal pronoun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-ASM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςhim.5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate